1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
166 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
177 by the \SpecialChar LyX
182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
184 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
185 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
186 Documentation mailing list:
187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
189 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
211 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
215 \begin_inset Note Note
218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
219 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
220 \begin_inset Newline newline
225 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
233 \begin_layout Standard
234 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
235 LatexCommand tableofcontents
242 \begin_layout Chapter
246 \begin_layout Section
247 What is \SpecialChar LyX
251 \begin_layout Standard
253 is a document preparation system.
254 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
255 scripts, publishable books, business
256 letters and proposals,
257 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
261 It is unlike most other
262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
271 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
287 pt type, left justified, 5
288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
297 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
301 \begin_layout Standard
302 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
307 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
311 \begin_layout Standard
316 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
317 's philosophy: most importantly,
318 the format of all of the manuals.
319 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
320 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
321 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
324 \begin_layout Section
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
331 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
333 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
334 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
338 \begin_layout Standard
339 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
340 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
341 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
343 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
344 only a vertical scrollbar.
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
349 The first case is large images.
350 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
351 the image and use the option
362 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
365 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
368 \begin_layout Standard
369 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
370 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
378 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
385 \begin_layout Section
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
392 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
394 Just select the manual you want to read from the
401 \begin_layout Section
402 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
406 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
413 \begin_layout Standard
414 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
415 can be configured via the menu
417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
421 \begin_inset Index idx
424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
431 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 packages are available.
435 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
437 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
438 was installed on your system,
439 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
444 \begin_inset space \space{}
447 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
448 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
450 To force \SpecialChar LyX
451 to re-inspect your system use
453 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
457 \begin_inset Index idx
460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
461 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
467 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
468 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
471 \begin_layout Section
474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
476 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
483 \begin_layout Standard
484 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
485 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 installed but you will not be
488 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
489 or print your documents
493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
494 Some \SpecialChar LyX
495 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
504 which can produce PDFs and the like.
507 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
512 every \SpecialChar LyX
513 document can still be output as plain text
514 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
520 \begin_layout Standard
521 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
527 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
528 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
531 \begin_layout Standard
532 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
534 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
537 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
545 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
546 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
549 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
553 \begin_inset Index idx
556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
557 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
572 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
576 \begin_layout Chapter
577 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
581 \begin_layout Section
582 Basic File Operations
583 \begin_inset Index idx
586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
595 \begin_layout Standard
600 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
601 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
642 arg "buffer-new-template"
648 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \begin_layout Itemize
678 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
682 \begin_layout Itemize
684 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
696 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
722 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
756 arg "buffer-write-as"
760 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
764 \begin_layout Itemize
766 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
782 \begin_layout Itemize
796 \begin_layout Itemize
810 \begin_layout Standard
811 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
812 few minor differences.
815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
826 command lists the available templates.
827 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
828 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
829 and possibly propose text fragments
831 for the document, features
832 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
835 you would otherwise need to
836 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
838 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
842 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
846 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
854 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
860 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
861 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
865 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
906 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
907 to open a file or create a new one, that big
908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
912 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
916 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
927 \begin_layout Standard
949 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
951 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
954 people work on the same document at the same time.
958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
962 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
967 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
968 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
972 \begin_inset Flex Emph
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
977 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
978 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
987 \begin_inset Flex Emph
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1000 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1011 \begin_inset space ~
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1020 will reload the document from disk.
1021 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1022 and want to restore it to the last save
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1035 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1036 them as your changes.
1039 \begin_layout Section
1040 Basic Editing Features
1041 \begin_inset Index idx
1044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1053 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1060 \begin_layout Standard
1061 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1062 can perform cut and paste operations
1063 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1064 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1065 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1066 editing features and how to access
1068 We will start with cut and paste.
1071 \begin_layout Standard
1072 As you might expect, the
1076 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1077 various other editing features.
1078 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1082 \begin_layout Itemize
1088 \begin_inset Index idx
1091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1120 \begin_layout Itemize
1126 \begin_inset Index idx
1129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1158 \begin_layout Itemize
1164 \begin_inset Index idx
1167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1192 \begin_layout Itemize
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1202 \begin_layout Itemize
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1212 \begin_layout Itemize
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset Index idx
1229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1256 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1266 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1272 \begin_layout Standard
1273 The first three are self-explanatory.
1274 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1275 and other programs using
1296 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1297 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1302 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1303 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1304 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1305 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1306 into individual cells.
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1315 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1316 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1320 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1331 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1346 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1347 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1348 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1354 \begin_inset space \space{}
1357 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1358 text which is often meaningless.)
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1368 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1387 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1388 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1389 is inserted as one paragraph.
1390 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1394 \begin_inset space ~
1399 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1400 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1409 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1423 \begin_inset space ~
1426 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1429 paste from the primary selection.
1430 This is normally the currently selected text.
1433 \begin_layout Standard
1436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1442 \begin_inset space ~
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1460 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1466 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1478 \begin_inset space ~
1483 button to skip the curren
1484 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1495 \begin_inset space ~
1500 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1504 \begin_inset space ~
1509 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1511 If the toggle is set, searching for
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 will not match the word
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 Match whole words only
1540 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1541 to only find complete words, e.
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1575 also offers an advanced
1578 \begin_inset space ~
1582 \begin_inset space ~
1587 feature that is described in section
1588 \begin_inset space ~
1592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1594 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1601 \begin_layout Standard
1602 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1603 \begin_inset space \space{}
1607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1615 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1617 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1622 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1629 \begin_layout Standard
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1637 When the cursor is inside an inset
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 selects the content of the inset.
1647 arg "inset-select-all"
1650 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1651 then to the whole document.
1655 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1658 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1662 \begin_layout Section
1664 \begin_inset Index idx
1667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1674 \begin_inset Index idx
1677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1686 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1693 \begin_layout Standard
1694 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1696 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1702 or the toolbar button
1709 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 or the toolbar button
1721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1728 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1732 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1737 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1738 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1747 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1748 This is a consequence of the 100
1749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1752 step undo limit mentioned above.
1755 \begin_layout Standard
1764 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1766 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1770 \begin_layout Section
1772 \begin_inset Index idx
1775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1784 \begin_layout Standard
1785 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1788 \begin_layout Enumerate
1793 \begin_layout Itemize
1798 once anywhere in the edit window.
1799 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1803 \begin_layout Enumerate
1808 \begin_layout Itemize
1815 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1821 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1822 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1825 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1831 \begin_layout Itemize
1832 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1842 \begin_layout Enumerate
1843 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1847 \begin_layout Standard
1848 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1849 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1853 \begin_layout Section
1855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1857 name "sec:Navigating"
1862 \begin_inset Index idx
1865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1876 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1884 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1885 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1888 \begin_layout Itemize
1889 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1891 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 or by the toolbar button
1901 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1907 \begin_layout Itemize
1908 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1910 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1913 and use the same menu to return to them.
1914 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1917 \begin_layout Standard
1921 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1926 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1927 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1934 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1935 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1936 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1937 last editing position.
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1945 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1949 \begin_layout Subsection
1951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1953 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Outline
1968 \begin_inset Index idx
1971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1982 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1983 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1984 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1990 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1994 ), notes, or citations (see section
1995 \begin_inset space ~
1999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2001 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2006 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2012 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2013 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2014 dialog and to modify the citation.
2017 \begin_layout Standard
2022 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2023 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2025 Labels and References
2027 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2036 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2039 \begin_layout Standard
2040 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2041 control the display.
2046 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2047 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2052 option keeps it in the current view state.
2053 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2057 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2058 \begin_inset space ~
2061 3, the subsections of sections
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2065 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2070 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2075 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2085 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2088 \begin_layout Standard
2095 button refreshes the TOC (
2096 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2098 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2102 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2104 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2108 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2112 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2116 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2120 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2122 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2126 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2128 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2132 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2134 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2138 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2142 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2144 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2148 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2152 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2156 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2160 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2164 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2168 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2172 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2176 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2178 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2182 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2196 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2197 For example, you can move section
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2205 2.4 or after section
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2224 (or the corresponding key bindings
2232 ) you can change the level of sections.
2233 You can make section
2234 \begin_inset space ~
2238 \begin_inset space ~
2242 \begin_inset space ~
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2249 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2250 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2253 \begin_layout Subsection
2254 Horizontal Scrolling
2255 \begin_inset Index idx
2258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2259 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2267 \begin_layout Standard
2269 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2271 \begin_inset space ~
2274 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2275 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2276 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2281 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2285 \begin_layout Itemize
2287 is used on a small tablet computer
2290 \begin_layout Itemize
2291 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2303 \begin_inset space ~
2316 \begin_layout Itemize
2317 Math constructs with long command names
2320 \begin_layout Standard
2321 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2322 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2324 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2325 window so that table
2326 \begin_inset space ~
2330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2332 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2337 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2339 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2340 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2343 \begin_layout Standard
2344 \begin_inset Float table
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2357 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2361 Horizontal scrolling test.
2369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2371 \begin_inset Tabular
2372 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2373 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 \begin_layout Section
2419 Input/Word Completion
2420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2422 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2427 \begin_inset Index idx
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2437 \begin_inset Index idx
2440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2471 \begin_layout Standard
2473 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2475 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2476 is used to propose completions.
2479 \begin_layout Standard
2480 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2488 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 \begin_inset space ~
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2508 \begin_inset space ~
2513 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2514 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2518 \begin_inset space ~
2524 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2525 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2526 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2527 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2530 \begin_layout Standard
2532 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2533 completions available.
2538 key to accept a proposed completion.
2539 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2540 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2541 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2544 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2551 \begin_layout Standard
2552 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2553 ing options for text.
2555 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2557 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2559 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2562 he special math option
2566 enables characters to be composed.
2568 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2570 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2574 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2577 you want to insert the character
2578 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2582 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2585 input the characters
2586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2598 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2600 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2604 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2606 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2611 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2613 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2616 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2619 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2621 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2624 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2629 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2635 's installation folder.
2637 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2638 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2645 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2650 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2651 In the example above,
2656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_layout Section
2690 \begin_inset Index idx
2693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2700 \begin_inset Index idx
2703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2732 \begin_inset Index idx
2735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2766 \begin_layout Standard
2767 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2781 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2784 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2788 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2789 \begin_inset space ~
2793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2795 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2802 \begin_layout Standard
2806 \begin_inset space ~
2814 \begin_inset space ~
2835 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2839 \begin_layout Labeling
2840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2844 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2845 LatexCommand nomenclature
2847 description "Tabulator key"
2854 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2856 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2857 \begin_inset space ~
2861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2863 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2870 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2874 , especially section
2875 \begin_inset space ~
2879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2881 reference "subsec:Lists"
2887 If you are still confused, look in the
2892 \begin_inset Newline newline
2900 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2901 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2905 \begin_layout Labeling
2906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2910 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2911 LatexCommand nomenclature
2913 description "Escape key"
2921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2928 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2929 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2932 \begin_layout Labeling
2933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2938 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2939 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 There are three modifier keys:
2947 \begin_layout Labeling
2948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2966 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2967 LatexCommand nomenclature
2969 description "Control key"
2974 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2975 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2979 \begin_layout Itemize
2988 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2991 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3012 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3016 \begin_layout Labeling
3017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3035 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3036 LatexCommand nomenclature
3038 description "Shift key"
3043 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3044 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3047 \begin_layout Labeling
3048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3067 LatexCommand nomenclature
3069 description "Alt or Meta key"
3074 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3075 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3076 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3082 \begin_inset Newline newline
3085 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3087 menu accelerator keys
3090 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3091 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3095 \begin_layout Standard
3096 For example, the sequence
3097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3103 \begin_inset space ~
3107 \begin_inset space ~
3113 \begin_inset space ~
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3140 \begin_inset space ~
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3161 manual lists all other things bound to the
3169 \begin_layout Standard
3170 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3172 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3174 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3175 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3177 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3178 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3179 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3181 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3197 followed by a capital
3204 \begin_layout Chapter
3207 \begin_inset Index idx
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3220 \begin_layout Section
3222 \begin_inset Index idx
3225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3234 \begin_layout Subsection
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3239 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3240 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3241 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3242 numbering schemes, and so on.
3243 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3244 and format the title of your document differently.
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3252 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3253 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3254 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3255 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3256 picks one for you by default.
3257 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3260 \begin_layout Subsection
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3274 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3281 \begin_layout Standard
3282 You can select a class using the
3284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3285 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3289 \begin_inset Index idx
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3307 \begin_layout Standard
3308 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3313 \begin_layout Description
3314 Article for basic articles
3317 \begin_layout Description
3318 Report for basic reports
3321 \begin_layout Description
3322 Book for writing a book
3325 \begin_layout Description
3326 Letter for US-style letters
3329 \begin_layout Standard
3330 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3331 only uses if you have installed
3332 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3334 distributions will include
3336 Here are some of the classes.
3337 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3339 Special Document Classes
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3352 \begin_layout Description
3353 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3357 \begin_layout Description
3358 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3362 \begin_layout Description
3363 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3364 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3365 There are three article layouts available.
3366 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3367 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3368 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3369 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 sequential numbering
3375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3378 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3379 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3380 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3381 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3384 \begin_layout Description
3385 Beamer Layout for presentations
3388 \begin_layout Description
3389 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3390 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3391 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3392 with \SpecialChar LyX
3396 \begin_layout Description
3397 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3400 \begin_layout Description
3402 \begin_inset space ~
3405 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3408 \begin_layout Description
3409 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3412 \begin_layout Description
3413 Foils Used to make transparencies
3416 \begin_layout Description
3417 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3418 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3419 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3420 with \SpecialChar LyX
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3426 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3429 \begin_layout Description
3430 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3433 \begin_layout Description
3434 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3437 \begin_layout Description
3438 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3439 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3440 (Is used by this document.)
3443 \begin_layout Description
3444 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3447 \begin_layout Description
3448 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3451 \begin_layout Description
3456 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3457 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3459 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3463 \begin_layout Description
3464 Slides Used to make transparencies
3467 \begin_layout Description
3469 \begin_inset space ~
3472 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3473 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3476 \begin_layout Description
3477 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3480 \begin_layout Standard
3481 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3483 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3485 Special Document Classes
3492 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3493 of the document classes.
3496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3501 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3506 \begin_inset Index idx
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3526 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3527 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3529 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3532 \begin_layout Standard
3535 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3540 , are highly specialized.
3542 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3543 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3544 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3545 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3546 by some document class.
3547 There are just too many of them.
3548 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3551 \begin_layout Standard
3552 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3560 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3561 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3562 document class for a new file.
3564 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3567 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3574 manual for information on how to install them.
3575 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3581 \begin_layout Standard
3582 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3583 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3584 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3585 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3586 class files to be used for dissertation
3587 s submitted to those universities.
3588 The \SpecialChar LyX
3589 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3591 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3595 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3601 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3608 name "subsec:Modules"
3613 \begin_inset Index idx
3616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 \begin_layout Standard
3626 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3627 chosen document class.
3628 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3629 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3640 \begin_inset Index idx
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3650 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3654 \begin_layout Standard
3655 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 packages or file format converters that are not always
3657 installed by default.
3659 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3660 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3661 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3662 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3664 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3665 file without the missing prerequisites.
3666 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3667 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3670 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3674 \begin_inset Index idx
3677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3685 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3689 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3702 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3704 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3715 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3718 \begin_layout Standard
3719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3727 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3729 will advise you about these things.
3737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3741 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3746 \begin_inset Index idx
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 Document ! Local Layout
3758 \begin_layout Standard
3759 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3760 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3761 : They are intended to be used in
3762 a variety of different documents.
3763 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3764 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3765 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3766 need a specific inset or
3767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3769 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3772 style only that one time.
3773 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3775 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3793 manual for information on how to use it.
3796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3800 \begin_layout Standard
3801 Each class has a default set of options.
3802 Here's a quick table describing them:
3805 \begin_layout Standard
3806 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3812 \begin_layout Standard
3814 \begin_inset Tabular
3815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3816 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 You're probably also wondering what
4284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4288 \begin_inset space ~
4292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4296 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4297 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4302 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4307 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4317 headings, there are also
4325 headings, and so on.
4326 We will describe these headings fully in section
4327 \begin_inset space ~
4331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4333 reference "subsec:Headings"
4340 \begin_layout Subsection
4342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4344 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4349 \begin_inset Index idx
4352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 \begin_inset Index idx
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4371 \begin_layout Standard
4372 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4381 \begin_inset space ~
4389 \begin_inset space ~
4394 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4396 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4397 doesn't support special options you want to
4398 use for your document.
4399 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4400 -class and its options, you have to read
4404 \begin_layout Standard
4406 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4410 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4414 \begin_inset space ~
4421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 \begin_inset space ~
4432 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4433 You can choose between the following five options:
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 Use default page style of current class.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4451 No page numbers or headings.
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4463 \begin_layout Labeling
4464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4469 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4470 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4471 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4472 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4475 \begin_layout Labeling
4476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4481 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4482 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4488 \begin_inset Index idx
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4499 How they are defined is explained in section
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4506 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4515 \begin_inset space ~
4519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4521 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4528 \begin_layout Subsection
4529 Paper Size and Orientation
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4534 Document ! Paper size
4540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4542 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4549 \begin_layout Standard
4550 You can find the following options in the menu
4553 \begin_inset space ~
4560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4564 \begin_inset Index idx
4567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4576 \begin_layout Labeling
4577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 What size paper to print on.
4591 \begin_layout Itemize
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 US letter, US legal, US executive
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Labeling
4635 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4640 To choose whether to output as
4651 \begin_layout Labeling
4652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4656 \begin_inset space ~
4661 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4662 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4665 \begin_layout Subsection
4667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4669 name "subsec:Margins"
4674 \begin_inset Index idx
4677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4684 \begin_inset Index idx
4687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4696 \begin_layout Standard
4697 Paper margins are set in the menu
4699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4703 \begin_inset Index idx
4706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4715 \begin_layout Standard
4716 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4717 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4718 the paper format and the font size into account.
4721 \begin_layout Subsection
4725 \begin_layout Standard
4726 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4727 has to convert everything into the new
4729 That includes the paragraph environments.
4730 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4731 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4732 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4734 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4743 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4745 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4746 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4747 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4750 \begin_layout Section
4751 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4752 \begin_inset Index idx
4755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4756 Paragraph ! Indentation
4764 \begin_layout Subsection
4766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4768 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4776 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4777 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4780 \begin_layout Standard
4781 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4782 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4783 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4784 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4788 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4794 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4795 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4796 language than English.
4798 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4802 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4803 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4804 into \SpecialChar LyX
4806 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4809 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4811 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4812 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4813 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4821 goes to produce a printable file.
4826 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4828 gives you the ability globally to change
4832 these pre-coded spacings.
4833 We will explain more later.
4836 \begin_layout Subsection
4837 Paragraph Separation
4838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4840 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4845 \begin_inset Index idx
4848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 Paragraph ! Separation
4857 \begin_layout Standard
4865 \begin_inset space ~
4873 \begin_inset space ~
4880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4884 \begin_inset Index idx
4887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4893 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4896 \begin_layout Subsection
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4901 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4906 \begin_inset space ~
4911 dialog and toggle the
4914 \begin_inset space ~
4919 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4922 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4926 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4927 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4932 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4933 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4936 \begin_layout Subsection
4938 \begin_inset Index idx
4941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4957 \begin_inset Index idx
4960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4969 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4973 \begin_inset space ~
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4999 installed to use this feature.
5004 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5008 \begin_inset space ~
5013 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5014 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5017 \begin_layout Section
5018 Paragraph Environments
5019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5021 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5026 \begin_inset Index idx
5029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 Paragraph ! Environments
5036 \begin_inset Index idx
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5040 Paragraph environments|(
5048 \begin_layout Subsection
5052 \begin_layout Standard
5053 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5056 \begin_layout Standard
5065 } \SpecialChar ldots
5075 \begin_inset Newline newline
5078 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5080 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5081 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5082 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5091 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5095 A paragraph environment is simply a
5096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5103 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5104 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5105 scheme, labels, and so on.
5106 Additionally, you can
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5114 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5115 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5116 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5117 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5119 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5121 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5126 \begin_inset Graphics
5127 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5133 at the left end of the toolbar.
5135 will change the environment of the
5139 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5140 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5141 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5153 create a new paragraph using the
5157 paragraph environment.
5159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5166 because if you are in one of these environments:
5169 \begin_layout Itemize
5175 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 \begin_layout Itemize
5187 \begin_layout Itemize
5193 \begin_layout Itemize
5199 \begin_layout Itemize
5205 \begin_layout Itemize
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5217 , rather than resetting it to
5222 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5223 \begin_inset space ~
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5229 reference "sec:Nesting"
5236 \begin_layout Subsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The default paragraph environment is
5246 It creates a plain paragraph.
5248 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5249 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5250 this manual) are in the
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 You can nest a paragraph using the
5262 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5270 \begin_layout Subsection
5272 \begin_inset Index idx
5275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5285 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5286 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5295 for thanks or contact information.
5296 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5297 places all of this on a separate page
5298 along with today's date.
5299 For other types of documents, the title
5300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5307 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5310 \begin_layout Standard
5312 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5326 Here's how you use them:
5329 \begin_layout Itemize
5330 Put the title of your document in the
5337 \begin_layout Itemize
5338 Put the author name in the
5345 \begin_layout Itemize
5346 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5347 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5353 Note that using this environment is optional.
5354 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5355 will automatically insert today's date.
5356 If you don't want a date, use the option
5358 Suppress default date on front page
5362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5365 \begin_inset space ~
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 You can use footnotes to insert
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5382 or contact information.
5385 \begin_layout Subsection
5387 \begin_inset Index idx
5390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5399 name "subsec:Headings"
5406 \begin_layout Standard
5407 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5409 takes care of the numbering for you.
5412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5414 \begin_inset Index idx
5417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5418 Section headings ! Numbered
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5427 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5431 \begin_layout Enumerate
5437 \begin_layout Enumerate
5443 \begin_layout Enumerate
5449 \begin_layout Enumerate
5455 \begin_layout Enumerate
5461 \begin_layout Enumerate
5467 \begin_layout Enumerate
5473 \begin_layout Standard
5475 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5476 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5477 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5478 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5480 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5482 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5488 \begin_layout Standard
5489 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5490 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5491 You group the book into chapters.
5493 does a similar grouping:
5496 \begin_layout Itemize
5501 is divided into either
5512 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Itemize
5536 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 \begin_layout Itemize
5572 \begin_layout Standard
5573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5581 Not all document types use the
5585 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5590 is the top-level heading.
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5603 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5604 labels it with its number,
5605 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5607 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5621 \begin_inset Index idx
5624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5634 The unnumbered section headings have a
5635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5642 at the end of their name.
5643 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5644 the table of contents, see section
5645 \begin_inset space ~
5649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5658 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5659 Changing the Numbering
5660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5662 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5669 \begin_layout Standard
5670 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5671 in the Table of Contents.
5672 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5674 Just as certain classes start with
5688 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5698 This is something you can change.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5708 \begin_inset Index idx
5711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5720 \begin_inset space ~
5724 \begin_inset space ~
5729 you will see two counters.
5734 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5735 numbers a section heading.
5736 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5741 Short Titles of Headings
5742 \begin_inset Index idx
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5746 Section headings ! Short titles
5752 \begin_inset Argument 1
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5764 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5771 \begin_layout Standard
5772 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5773 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5774 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5775 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5778 \begin_layout Standard
5780 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5781 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5782 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5783 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5794 This will insert a box labeled
5795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5799 \begin_inset space ~
5803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5806 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5807 This also works for captions inside floats.
5808 There can only be one short title per title.
5811 \begin_layout Standard
5812 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5819 \begin_layout Standard
5820 The following information applies to all section headings:
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5827 \begin_layout Itemize
5828 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5839 \begin_layout Subsection
5843 \begin_layout Standard
5845 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5859 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5860 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5861 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5862 the text they contain.
5863 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5871 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5875 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5884 when you start a new paragraph.
5885 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5889 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5890 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5891 have to change back to the
5895 environment yourself.
5898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5907 \begin_inset Index idx
5910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5921 time for the differences.
5930 are identical except for one difference:
5934 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5943 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5947 Here's an example of the
5960 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5962 See – no indentation!
5966 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5967 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5968 the other paragraph.
5971 \begin_layout Standard
5972 Here's another example, this time in the
5979 \begin_layout Quotation
5985 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5986 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5987 the first line, then
5991 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5995 you were quoting other text.
5998 \begin_layout Quotation
5999 Here's a new paragraph.
6000 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6001 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6004 \begin_layout Standard
6005 As the examples show,
6009 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6010 They should put quotes in the
6015 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6019 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6024 \begin_inset Index idx
6027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6034 \begin_inset Index idx
6037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6053 \begin_layout Standard
6058 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6064 \begin_inset Newline newline
6067 Which I did not rehearse!
6071 It could be much worse.
6072 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6074 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6075 indented a bit more than the first.
6076 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6082 \begin_inset Newline newline
6085 And make things look fine
6086 \begin_inset Newline newline
6092 arg "newline-insert newline"
6098 \begin_layout Standard
6103 does not indent both margins.
6104 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6105 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6108 arg "newline-insert newline"
6114 \begin_layout Subsection
6116 \begin_inset Index idx
6119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6137 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6147 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6148 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6157 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6158 lets you provide your own label.
6159 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6160 describing some general features of all four of them.
6163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6170 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6171 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6180 reset the environment to
6184 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6185 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6186 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6190 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6194 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6203 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6204 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6206 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6207 you read all of section
6208 \begin_inset space ~
6212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6214 reference "sec:Nesting"
6221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6223 \begin_inset Index idx
6226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6242 \begin_layout Standard
6243 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6247 paragraph environment.
6248 It has the following properties:
6251 \begin_layout Itemize
6252 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6256 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6261 \begin_layout Itemize
6262 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6266 \begin_layout Itemize
6267 The items can have any length.
6269 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6270 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6277 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 environment inside another
6286 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6291 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6294 \begin_layout Itemize
6296 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6299 \begin_layout Itemize
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6307 reference "sec:Nesting"
6311 for a full explanation of nesting.
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6325 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6328 \begin_layout Standard
6329 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6330 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the first level
6338 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6342 \begin_layout Itemize
6343 The label for the second level is a dash.
6347 \begin_layout Itemize
6348 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6352 \begin_layout Itemize
6353 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Back out to the third level.
6362 \begin_layout Itemize
6363 Back to the second level.
6367 \begin_layout Itemize
6368 Back to the outermost level.
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6372 These are the default labels for an
6377 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6382 dialog in the submenu
6387 \begin_inset Index idx
6390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6396 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6400 \begin_layout Standard
6401 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6402 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6404 \begin_inset space ~
6408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6410 reference "sec:Nesting"
6417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6419 \begin_inset Index idx
6422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6431 name "sec:Enumerate"
6438 \begin_layout Standard
6443 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6444 It has these properties:
6447 \begin_layout Enumerate
6448 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6452 \begin_layout Enumerate
6453 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6457 \begin_layout Enumerate
6459 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6462 \begin_layout Enumerate
6467 environment resets the counter to one.
6470 \begin_layout Enumerate
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6485 Items can have any length.
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6489 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6492 \begin_layout Enumerate
6493 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6496 \begin_layout Enumerate
6497 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6501 \begin_layout Standard
6510 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6512 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6513 labels the four different levels in an
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The first level of an
6525 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6529 \begin_layout Enumerate
6530 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6539 \begin_layout Enumerate
6540 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6543 \begin_layout Enumerate
6544 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6549 \begin_layout Enumerate
6550 Back to the third level
6554 \begin_layout Enumerate
6555 Back to the second level.
6559 \begin_layout Enumerate
6560 Back to the outermost level.
6563 \begin_layout Standard
6564 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6568 environment, see section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6580 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6584 \begin_layout Standard
6585 There is more to nesting
6589 environments than we've stated here.
6590 You should read section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "sec:Nesting"
6601 to learn more about nesting.
6604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6606 \begin_inset Index idx
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6619 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6623 list has no fixed label.
6624 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6633 of the first line as the label.
6637 \begin_layout Description
6638 Example: This is an example of the
6645 \begin_layout Standard
6647 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6651 \begin_layout Standard
6653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6660 it is meant that the first usage of the
6664 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6666 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6674 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6682 \begin_inset space ~
6688 \begin_inset space ~
6692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6694 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6698 for more information.) Here is an example:
6701 \begin_layout Description
6703 \begin_inset space ~
6706 Example: This one shows how to use a
6709 \begin_inset space ~
6721 \begin_layout Description
6722 Usage: You should use the
6726 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6727 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6729 It's not a good idea to use a
6733 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6734 You're better off using
6746 paragraphs into them.
6749 \begin_layout Description
6750 Nesting: You can nest
6754 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6758 \begin_layout Standard
6759 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6760 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6761 them from the first line.
6764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6766 \begin_inset Index idx
6769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_layout Standard
6783 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6784 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6788 \begin_layout Standard
6797 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6799 Here are its properties:
6802 \begin_layout Labeling
6803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6805 \begin_inset space ~
6808 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6817 of each line as the item label.
6822 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6823 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6824 space as described above.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6829 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6830 uses different margins for the item label and the
6831 body of the item text.
6832 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6833 label width plus a little extra space.
6836 \begin_layout Labeling
6837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6839 \begin_inset space ~
6842 width \SpecialChar LyX
6843 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6844 If the label width is larger, the label
6845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6852 into the first line.
6853 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6854 margin of the rest of the item text.
6857 \begin_layout Labeling
6858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6860 \begin_inset space ~
6863 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6868 environment has the same left margin.
6869 \begin_inset Newline newline
6872 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6877 \begin_inset space ~
6882 dialog (toolbar button
6885 arg "layout-paragraph"
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6897 determines the default label width.
6898 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6907 multiple times instead.
6908 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6918 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6926 every time you alter a label in a
6931 \begin_inset Newline newline
6934 The predefined default width is the length of
6935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6943 \begin_inset space ~
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6954 list the same way as the
6958 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6964 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6973 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6974 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6976 \begin_inset space ~
6980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6982 reference "sec:Nesting"
6986 to learn about nesting.
6989 \begin_layout Standard
6990 There is yet another feature of the
6994 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6995 left-justifies the item labels by
6997 You can use additional
7001 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7002 justifies the item label.
7007 are documented in section
7008 \begin_inset space ~
7012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7014 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7019 Here are some examples:
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 Left The default for
7031 \begin_layout Labeling
7032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7033 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7043 \begin_layout Labeling
7044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7045 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7049 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7056 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7059 \begin_layout Subsection
7061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7063 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7068 \begin_inset Index idx
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 The features described in this section require that the module
7083 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7085 is loaded in the document settings.
7086 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7092 \begin_inset Index idx
7095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7106 Custom Enumerate Lists
7107 \begin_inset Index idx
7110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7121 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7127 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7128 There you add the command
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7153 Code, look at section
7154 \begin_inset space ~
7158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7160 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7173 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7180 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7181 For capital Roman numerals replace
7193 in the command above.
7194 For Arabic numerals use
7202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7209 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7224 \begin_layout Standard
7226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 You can only number 26
7235 \begin_inset space ~
7238 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7246 \begin_layout Standard
7247 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7248 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7251 \begin_layout Standard
7252 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7255 \begin_layout Enumerate
7256 \begin_inset Argument 1
7259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7285 \begin_layout Enumerate
7286 \begin_inset Argument 1
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_layout Enumerate
7318 \begin_inset Argument 1
7321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7345 \begin_layout Enumerate
7346 \begin_inset Argument 1
7349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7376 For this list these commands were used:
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7390 \begin_inset Newline newline
7398 \begin_inset Newline newline
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7423 makes the label emphasized and
7432 \begin_layout Standard
7433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7442 lists until you change the definition.
7450 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7456 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7465 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7468 \begin_layout Enumerate
7469 \begin_inset Argument 1
7472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7491 \begin_inset Note Note
7494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7495 goes back to default numbering
7503 \begin_layout Enumerate
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7511 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7521 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7522 to indicate that it is a resumed
7523 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7524 , but in the output.
7527 \begin_layout Standard
7528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7546 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7548 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7549 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7550 of a normal enumeration.
7551 There, insert the command
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_layout Standard
7565 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7569 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_layout Enumerate
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7578 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7581 \begin_layout Enumerate
7582 \begin_inset Argument 1
7585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 This enumeration starts at 4
7604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7606 \begin_inset Index idx
7609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7621 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7624 \begin_layout Itemize
7628 \begin_layout Itemize
7629 with standard spacing
7632 \begin_layout Standard
7633 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7635 Add there the command
7639 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7642 \begin_layout Itemize
7643 \begin_inset Argument 1
7646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7665 \begin_layout Itemize
7669 \begin_layout Itemize
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7681 \begin_inset Index idx
7684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7692 For more information see its documentation,
7693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7703 \begin_layout Standard
7704 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7706 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7707 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7711 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7714 \begin_layout Enumerate
7715 \begin_inset Argument 1
7718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7726 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7739 \begin_layout Enumerate
7740 with negative indentation
7743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7744 Further Customization
7745 \begin_inset Index idx
7748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7749 Lists ! Customization
7757 \begin_layout Standard
7758 You can also change the style of description lists.
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 changes the description label font, the command
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 sets the list style.
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7783 An example where the command
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7791 itshape, style=nextline
7794 \begin_layout Standard
7798 \begin_layout Description
7800 \begin_inset space ~
7804 \begin_inset Argument 1
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7815 itshape, style=nextline
7825 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7826 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7830 \begin_layout Description
7832 \begin_inset space ~
7835 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7836 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7837 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7847 \begin_inset Index idx
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 For more information see its documentation
7859 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7869 \begin_layout Subsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7885 \begin_inset space ~
7888 Address: An Overview
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7893 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7901 \begin_inset space ~
7907 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7908 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7909 gags on the document.
7910 In contrast, you can use the
7917 \begin_inset space ~
7922 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7923 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7928 Of course, you're not limited to using
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7944 \begin_inset space ~
7949 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7950 some European academic papers.
7953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7957 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7964 \begin_layout Standard
7969 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7970 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7974 \begin_inset space ~
7979 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7980 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7981 Here's an example of each:
7984 \begin_layout Right Address
7986 \begin_inset Newline newline
7990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7994 \begin_inset Newline newline
7997 When is it? What is today?
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8004 \begin_inset space ~
8010 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8012 the largest block of text on a single line.
8013 Here's an example of the
8020 \begin_layout Address
8022 \begin_inset Newline newline
8025 Where do I send this
8026 \begin_inset Newline newline
8029 Your post office and country
8032 \begin_layout Standard
8033 As you can see, both
8040 \begin_inset space ~
8045 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8050 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8051 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8057 This makes sense, since
8065 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8066 Thus, you have to use
8073 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8085 \begin_inset space ~
8090 ) to start a new line in an
8097 \begin_inset space ~
8105 \begin_layout Subsection
8109 \begin_layout Standard
8110 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8111 or list of references.
8113 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8118 \begin_inset Index idx
8121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8130 \begin_layout Standard
8135 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8136 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8137 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8138 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8142 in anything else or vice versa.
8148 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8149 The book document classes ignores the
8153 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8157 in a letter document class.
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8165 environment does several things for you.
8166 First, it puts the centered label
8167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8175 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8177 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8178 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8179 the subsequent text.
8180 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8182 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8187 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8191 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8192 The new paragraph will still be in the
8197 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8198 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8201 \begin_layout Standard
8202 \begin_inset Float figure
8209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Graphics
8212 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8225 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 We would love to demonstrate the
8251 environment, but since this document is in the
8252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 class, we can't do this.
8260 We inserted it therefore as figure
8261 \begin_inset space ~
8265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8267 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8272 If you have never heard of an
8273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8280 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8285 \begin_inset Index idx
8288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8297 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8309 environment is used to list references.
8310 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8311 only use it at the end of the document.
8323 \begin_layout Standard
8324 When you first open a
8328 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8329 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8345 depending on the document class.
8346 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8347 Each paragraph of the
8351 environment is a bibliography entry.
8356 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8357 Each new paragraph is still in the
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8365 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8366 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8368 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8370 handling, have a look at section
8371 \begin_inset space ~
8375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8377 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8384 \begin_layout Subsection
8385 Special Environments
8388 \begin_layout Standard
8390 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8391 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8412 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8425 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8427 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8432 key as a fixed whitespace.
8436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8449 \begin_inset space ~
8454 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8472 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8475 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8478 arg "newline-insert newline"
8495 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8496 So, when you finish using the
8501 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8502 Also, you can nest the
8507 environment inside of others.
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8511 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8514 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 arg "newline-insert newline"
8521 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8526 \begin_inset space \space{}
8536 arg "newline-insert newline"
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 arg "newline-insert newline"
8556 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8564 You must put at least one
8568 in any line you want blank.
8569 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8578 since that will insert
8583 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8586 arg "self-insert \""
8592 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8600 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8608 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8612 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 printf("Hello World!
8618 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8622 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8626 \begin_layout Standard
8627 This is just the standard
8628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8638 \begin_layout Standard
8644 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8646 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8647 as if you used a typewriter.
8648 \begin_inset Index idx
8651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8652 Paragraph environments|)
8657 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8660 Program Code Listings
8665 \begin_inset space ~
8673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8677 \begin_inset Index idx
8680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8694 environment is similar to the
8699 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8700 computer console text.
8705 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8719 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8720 you can have empty lines.
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 have a certain language and a text style
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8739 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8740 and \SpecialChar TeX
8744 \begin_layout Standard
8745 Because of these properties
8749 works like a typewriter.
8753 \begin_layout Verbatim
8757 \begin_layout Verbatim
8760 The following 2 lines are empty:
8763 \begin_layout Verbatim
8767 \begin_layout Verbatim
8771 \begin_layout Verbatim
8772 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8782 environment is identical to
8786 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8787 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8794 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8798 \begin_layout Section
8799 Nesting Environments
8800 \begin_inset Index idx
8803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8804 Nesting ! Environments
8810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8819 \begin_layout Subsection
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8825 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8827 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8829 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8831 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8843 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8852 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8861 \begin_layout Enumerate
8865 \begin_layout Standard
8866 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8867 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8869 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8871 \begin_inset space ~
8875 \begin_inset space ~
8883 \begin_inset space ~
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8892 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8894 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8897 arg "depth-increment"
8903 arg "depth-decrement"
8917 arg "depth-increment"
8923 arg "depth-decrement"
8927 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8928 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8933 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8934 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8935 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8936 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8937 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8940 \begin_layout Standard
8941 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8943 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8945 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8948 \begin_layout Subsection
8949 What You Can and Can't Nest
8952 \begin_layout Standard
8953 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8954 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8957 \begin_layout Standard
8958 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8959 than a simple yes or no.
8960 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8963 \begin_layout Itemize
8964 Completely unnestable
8967 \begin_layout Itemize
8968 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8972 \begin_layout Itemize
8973 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8977 \begin_layout Standard
8978 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8979 environments have them:
8982 \begin_layout Description
8983 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8984 Can't nest into them.
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8994 \begin_layout Itemize
9000 \begin_layout Itemize
9006 \begin_layout Itemize
9012 \begin_layout Itemize
9019 \begin_layout Description
9021 \begin_inset space ~
9024 Nestable You can nest them.
9025 You can nest other things into them.
9029 \begin_layout Itemize
9035 \begin_layout Itemize
9041 \begin_layout Itemize
9047 \begin_layout Itemize
9053 \begin_layout Itemize
9059 \begin_layout Itemize
9065 \begin_layout Itemize
9071 \begin_layout Itemize
9078 \begin_layout Itemize
9084 \begin_layout Itemize
9091 \begin_layout Description
9092 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9093 You can't nest anything into them.
9097 \begin_layout Itemize
9103 \begin_layout Itemize
9109 \begin_layout Itemize
9115 \begin_layout Itemize
9121 \begin_layout Itemize
9127 \begin_layout Itemize
9133 \begin_layout Itemize
9139 \begin_layout Itemize
9145 \begin_layout Itemize
9151 \begin_layout Itemize
9157 \begin_layout Itemize
9163 \begin_layout Itemize
9169 \begin_layout Itemize
9175 \begin_layout Itemize
9179 \begin_inset space ~
9185 \begin_layout Itemize
9192 \begin_layout Standard
9193 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9201 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9211 \begin_inset space ~
9214 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9215 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9216 nested section headings violate this.
9224 \begin_layout Subsection
9225 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9226 \begin_inset Index idx
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9230 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9238 \begin_layout Standard
9239 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9240 affected by nesting anyhow.
9244 \begin_layout Itemize
9248 \begin_layout Itemize
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9256 \begin_layout Standard
9258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9266 Figures and tables in
9270 are not affected by this.
9275 Have a look at section
9276 \begin_inset space ~
9280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9282 reference "sec:Floats"
9286 for more information about
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9295 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9296 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9300 \begin_layout Standard
9301 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9309 of its own, it behaves just like a
9310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9317 paragraph environment.
9318 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9322 \begin_layout Standard
9323 Here's an example with a table:
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9332 This is (a) and it's nested.
9336 \begin_layout Standard
9337 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9343 \begin_layout Standard
9345 \begin_inset Tabular
9346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9347 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9433 \begin_layout Standard
9434 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9441 \begin_layout Enumerate
9443 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9447 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 \begin_layout Standard
9452 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9455 \begin_layout Enumerate
9460 \begin_layout Enumerate
9461 This is (a) and it's nested.
9465 \begin_layout Standard
9466 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9472 \begin_layout Standard
9474 \begin_inset Tabular
9475 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9476 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9562 \begin_layout Standard
9563 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9569 \begin_layout Enumerate
9576 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9579 \begin_layout Enumerate
9583 \begin_layout Standard
9584 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9588 \begin_layout Standard
9589 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9592 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9595 \begin_layout Enumerate
9600 \begin_layout Enumerate
9601 This is (a) and it's nested.
9604 \begin_layout Standard
9605 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9611 \begin_layout Standard
9613 \begin_inset Tabular
9614 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9615 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9616 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9617 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9702 \begin_layout Standard
9703 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9711 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9718 \begin_layout Enumerate
9722 \begin_layout Standard
9723 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9729 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9730 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9734 \begin_layout Subsection
9735 Usage and General Features
9738 \begin_layout Standard
9739 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9740 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9749 is the innermost possible depth.
9750 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9754 level #1 – outermost
9758 \begin_layout Enumerate
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 \begin_layout Enumerate
9773 \begin_layout Itemize
9778 \begin_layout Itemize
9787 \begin_layout Standard
9788 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9789 both of them in the example.
9790 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9800 For example, if we tried to nest another
9805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9812 , we would get errors.
9815 \begin_layout Subsection
9817 \begin_inset Index idx
9820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9829 \begin_layout Standard
9830 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9831 We have several examples of nested environments.
9832 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9837 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9840 \begin_layout Labeling
9841 \labelwidthstring MMM
9842 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9851 \begin_layout Labeling
9852 \labelwidthstring MMM
9853 #2-a This is level #2.
9854 We created it by using
9857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9863 arg "depth-increment"
9870 \begin_layout Labeling
9871 \labelwidthstring MMM
9872 #3-a This is level #3.
9873 This time, we just enter
9880 arg "depth-increment"
9884 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9888 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9894 arg "depth-increment"
9901 \begin_layout Standard
9906 environment, nested inside of
9907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9915 So, it's at level #4.
9916 We did this by entering
9919 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9925 arg "depth-increment"
9928 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9933 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9949 \begin_layout Standard
9954 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9957 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9963 \begin_layout Labeling
9964 \labelwidthstring MMM
9965 #4-a This is level #4.
9969 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9972 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9977 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9981 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9986 keep nesting things inside
9987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9998 \begin_layout Labeling
9999 \labelwidthstring MMM
10000 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10005 \begin_layout Labeling
10006 \labelwidthstring MMM
10007 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10008 and this is level #6.
10009 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10013 \begin_layout Labeling
10014 \labelwidthstring MMM
10015 #5-b Back to level #5.
10019 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10025 arg "depth-decrement"
10032 \begin_layout Labeling
10033 \labelwidthstring MMM
10037 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10043 arg "depth-decrement"
10046 , we're back at level #4.
10050 \begin_layout Labeling
10051 \labelwidthstring MMM
10052 #3-b Back to level #3.
10053 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10057 \begin_layout Labeling
10058 \labelwidthstring MMM
10059 #2-b Back to level #2.
10063 \begin_layout Labeling
10064 \labelwidthstring MMM
10065 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10066 After this sentence, we will enter
10070 and change the paragraph environment back to
10077 \begin_layout Standard
10078 We could have also used the
10094 environment in place of the
10099 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10102 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10103 Example 2: Inheritance
10106 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10107 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10110 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10119 arg "depth-increment"
10123 \begin_inset Newline newline
10126 which, we will change to the
10134 \begin_layout Enumerate
10139 environment, at level #2.
10142 \begin_layout Enumerate
10143 Notice how the nested
10147 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10151 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10156 We ended this example by entering
10161 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10165 and reset the nesting depth by using
10168 arg "depth-decrement"
10174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10175 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10184 \begin_inset Argument 1
10187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10188 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10196 \begin_layout Enumerate
10197 This is level #1, in an
10201 paragraph environment.
10202 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10206 \begin_layout Enumerate
10211 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10217 arg "depth-increment"
10221 Now, what happens if we nest an
10225 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10226 label be? An asterisk?
10230 \begin_layout Itemize
10240 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10241 So, its label is a bullet.
10242 (We got here by using
10245 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10251 arg "depth-increment"
10254 , then changing the environment to
10262 \begin_layout Itemize
10263 Here's level #4, produced using
10266 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10272 arg "depth-increment"
10276 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10281 \begin_layout Enumerate
10283 to get to level #5.
10284 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10289 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10293 , because we are in the
10301 environment (that is, it is an
10316 \begin_layout Enumerate
10321 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10322 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10326 \begin_layout Enumerate
10327 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10330 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10333 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10336 \begin_layout Enumerate
10340 arg "depth-decrement"
10343 to decrease the depth after the next
10346 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10353 \begin_layout Enumerate
10355 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10360 \begin_layout Enumerate
10362 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10363 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10367 \begin_layout Enumerate
10368 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10377 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10382 reset the counter for the label.
10386 \begin_layout Enumerate
10390 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10396 arg "depth-decrement"
10399 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10400 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10401 into the twofold-nested
10409 \begin_layout Enumerate
10410 The same thing happens if we do another
10413 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10419 arg "depth-decrement"
10422 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10425 \begin_layout Standard
10426 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10431 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10442 The number of other
10446 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10453 The same rule applies for the
10457 environment, as well.
10460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10461 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10465 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10466 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10467 the same detail with how we did it.
10476 \begin_layout Standard
10484 arg "depth-increment"
10491 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10492 the example in parentheses someplace.
10493 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10494 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10495 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10499 \begin_layout Enumerate
10504 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10508 \begin_layout Verse
10509 Now we will add verse.
10510 \begin_inset Newline newline
10513 It will get much worse.
10514 \begin_inset Newline newline
10524 arg "depth-increment"
10534 \begin_layout Verse
10535 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10536 \begin_inset Newline newline
10539 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10540 \begin_inset Newline newline
10546 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10554 \begin_layout Verse
10555 Here comes a table:
10559 \begin_layout Standard
10560 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10566 \begin_layout Standard
10568 \begin_inset Tabular
10569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10570 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10657 \begin_layout Verse
10661 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10671 arg "depth-increment"
10677 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10683 \begin_inset Newline newline
10691 arg "depth-decrement"
10698 \begin_layout Enumerate
10703 : level #1) This is another item.
10704 Note that selecting a
10708 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10709 3 times to put the table inside the
10716 \begin_layout Quotation
10717 We're now ending the
10721 list and changing to
10726 We're still at level #1.
10727 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10728 The next set of paragraphs is a
10729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10736 We will nest both the
10743 \begin_inset space ~
10748 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10752 for the letter body.
10756 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10759 to preserve the depth.
10760 Remember that you need to use
10763 arg "newline-insert newline"
10766 to create multiple lines inside the
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10783 \begin_layout Right Address
10785 \begin_inset Newline newline
10788 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10789 \begin_inset Newline newline
10795 \begin_layout Address
10797 \begin_inset space ~
10803 \begin_layout Quotation
10804 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10808 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10809 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10810 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10811 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10812 as soon as possible.
10813 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10816 \begin_layout Quotation
10817 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10818 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10819 with your order, along with payment.
10822 \begin_layout Quotation
10823 We thank you again for your patience.
10826 \begin_layout Address
10828 \begin_inset Newline newline
10835 \begin_layout Quotation
10836 That ends that example!
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10841 gives you a lot of power with just
10843 We could have easily nested an
10864 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10867 \begin_layout Subsection
10869 \begin_inset Index idx
10872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10873 Nesting ! Separation
10879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10881 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10888 \begin_layout Standard
10889 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10891 For example you need two different enumerations:
10894 \begin_layout Enumerate
10899 \begin_layout Enumerate
10904 \begin_layout Enumerate
10908 \begin_layout Standard
10909 \begin_inset Separator plain
10915 \begin_layout Itemize
10921 \begin_layout Standard
10922 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10928 \begin_layout Enumerate
10932 \begin_layout Enumerate
10936 \begin_layout Enumerate
10940 \begin_layout Standard
10941 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10942 list item and use the menu
10944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10945 Separated <Name> Above
10949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10950 Separated <Name> Below
10953 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10954 ) and before or behind it the
10956 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10959 \begin_layout Standard
10960 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10961 (red arrow in LyX).
10962 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10963 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10966 \begin_layout Standard
10967 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10970 arg "paragraph-break"
10977 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10980 \begin_layout Section
10981 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
10982 \begin_inset Index idx
10985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10994 \begin_layout Standard
10995 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10996 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10998 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10999 be broken at the end of a line.
11000 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11004 \begin_layout Subsection
11006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11008 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11013 \begin_inset Index idx
11016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11025 \begin_layout Standard
11026 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11027 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11028 ) not to break the line at
11030 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11033 \begin_layout Quote
11034 Further documentation is given in section
11035 \begin_inset Newline newline
11039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11041 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11048 \begin_layout Standard
11049 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11064 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11073 A protected space is set with
11075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11076 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11078 \begin_inset space ~
11086 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11092 \begin_layout Subsection
11094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11096 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11101 \begin_inset Index idx
11104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11105 Spacing ! Horizontal
11113 \begin_layout Standard
11114 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11121 The length units are listed in Appendix
11122 \begin_inset space ~
11126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11128 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11139 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11144 \begin_inset Index idx
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11148 Spaces ! Inter-word
11156 \begin_layout Standard
11157 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11158 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11159 at the ends of sentences.
11160 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11161 automatically takes care about this.
11162 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11163 followed by a period; see section
11164 \begin_inset space ~
11168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11170 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11175 To insert a normal space, select
11177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11178 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11180 \begin_inset space ~
11188 arg "space-insert normal"
11194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11198 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11203 \begin_inset Index idx
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11215 \begin_layout Standard
11217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11224 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11233 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11234 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11235 inside abbreviations:
11238 \begin_layout Quote
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11244 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11247 \begin_layout Standard
11248 or between values and units.
11249 Compare for example this:
11250 \begin_inset Newline newline
11254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11258 \begin_inset Newline newline
11261 10 kg (normal space
11264 \begin_layout Standard
11265 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11270 \begin_inset space ~
11278 arg "space-insert thin"
11284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11288 \begin_layout Standard
11289 You can also insert the following space types:
11292 \begin_layout Description
11294 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11296 \begin_inset space ~
11302 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11306 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11310 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11314 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11316 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11319 space between the arrows.
11320 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11324 \begin_layout Description
11326 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11328 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11332 \begin_inset space ~
11335 space A line with a
11336 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11340 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11344 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11348 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11350 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11353 space between the arrows.
11356 \begin_layout Description
11358 \begin_inset space ~
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11365 space A line with a
11366 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11370 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11374 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11377 negative thin space between the arrows.
11380 \begin_layout Description
11382 \begin_inset space ~
11386 \begin_inset space ~
11389 space A line with a
11390 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11394 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11398 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11401 negative medium space between the arrows.
11404 \begin_layout Description
11406 \begin_inset space ~
11410 \begin_inset space ~
11413 space A line with a
11414 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11418 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11422 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11425 negative thick space between the arrows.
11428 \begin_layout Description
11430 \begin_inset space ~
11434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11438 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11442 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11446 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11450 \begin_inset space ~
11454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11457 em) space between the arrows.
11460 \begin_layout Description
11462 \begin_inset space ~
11466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11470 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11474 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11478 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11482 \begin_inset space ~
11486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11489 em) space between the arrows.
11492 \begin_layout Description
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11502 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11506 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11510 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11521 em) space between the arrows.
11524 \begin_layout Description
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11530 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11534 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11539 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11546 cm space between the arrows.
11549 \begin_layout Standard
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11557 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11561 lists the different space sizes.
11564 \begin_layout Standard
11565 \begin_inset Float table
11572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11573 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11578 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11582 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11592 \begin_inset Tabular
11593 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11594 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11693 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11699 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11710 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11721 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11727 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11738 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11768 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11927 \begin_inset Index idx
11930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11939 \begin_layout Standard
11940 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11941 feature for adding extra space
11942 in a uniform fashion.
11943 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11944 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11945 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11946 equally between themselves.
11949 \begin_layout Standard
11950 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11953 \begin_layout Quote
11955 This is on the left side
11956 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11959 This is on the right
11962 \begin_layout Quote
11965 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11969 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11975 \begin_layout Quote
11978 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11982 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11986 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11992 \begin_layout Standard
11993 That was an example in the
11999 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12003 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12007 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12010 is one in a standard paragraph.
12011 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12015 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12018 \begin_layout Standard
12019 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12022 \begin_inset space ~
12027 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12030 \begin_layout Standard
12032 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12036 \begin_inset space ~
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12044 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12048 \begin_inset space ~
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12060 \begin_inset space ~
12066 \begin_layout Standard
12068 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12072 \begin_inset space ~
12078 \begin_layout Standard
12080 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12082 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12086 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12087 (= opened downwards)
12090 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12094 \begin_inset space ~
12100 \begin_layout Standard
12102 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12104 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12112 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12116 \begin_inset space ~
12122 \begin_layout Standard
12123 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12131 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12135 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12137 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12138 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12142 option in the space dialog.
12150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12154 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12159 \begin_inset Index idx
12162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12171 \begin_layout Standard
12172 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12173 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12180 What is correct English?:
12181 \begin_inset Newline newline
12185 \begin_inset Newline newline
12189 \begin_inset space ~
12192 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12193 \begin_inset Newline newline
12197 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12208 \begin_inset Newline newline
12212 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12223 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12229 \begin_layout Standard
12231 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12236 \begin_inset space ~
12240 \begin_inset space ~
12244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12248 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12261 \begin_inset space ~
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12272 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12281 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12282 That is why it is named
12283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12291 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12292 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12296 \begin_layout Subsection
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12300 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12305 \begin_inset Index idx
12308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12317 \begin_layout Standard
12318 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12320 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12321 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12323 \begin_inset space ~
12329 There you find the following sizes:
12332 \begin_layout Standard
12345 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12346 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12351 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12356 \begin_inset space ~
12362 \begin_inset Index idx
12365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12366 Document ! Settings
12371 for the paragraph separation.
12372 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12381 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12387 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12396 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12397 size including line spacing.
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12408 \begin_inset Index idx
12411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12417 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12418 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12423 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12424 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12433 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12442 s are described in section
12443 \begin_inset space ~
12447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12449 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12458 If there are several
12462 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12463 You can therefore use
12467 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12470 \begin_layout Standard
12475 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12476 \begin_inset space ~
12480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12482 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12489 \begin_layout Standard
12490 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12501 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12513 \begin_layout Subsection
12514 Paragraph Alignment
12515 \begin_inset Index idx
12518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 Paragraph ! Alignment
12527 \begin_layout Standard
12528 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12533 dialog (toolbar button
12536 arg "layout-paragraph"
12540 There are five possibilities:
12543 \begin_layout Itemize
12551 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12557 \begin_layout Itemize
12565 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12571 \begin_layout Itemize
12579 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12585 \begin_layout Itemize
12593 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12599 \begin_layout Itemize
12607 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12613 \begin_layout Standard
12614 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12615 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12616 the left and right margins.
12617 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12622 This paragraph is right aligned,
12625 \begin_layout Standard
12627 this one is centered,
12630 \begin_layout Standard
12632 this one is left aligned.
12635 \begin_layout Subsection
12637 \begin_inset Index idx
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12641 Page breaks ! Forced
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12649 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12656 \begin_layout Standard
12657 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12659 force a page break where you want one.
12660 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 is good at page breaking.
12662 Only if you use a lot of
12666 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12670 \begin_layout Standard
12671 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12672 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12676 have to change the page breaking.
12679 \begin_layout Standard
12680 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12682 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12685 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12687 \begin_inset space ~
12693 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12696 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12698 \begin_inset space ~
12703 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12705 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12706 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12709 \begin_layout Standard
12710 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12711 at the top of a page.
12712 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12714 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12715 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12716 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12720 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12724 to learn more about
12731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12735 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12740 \begin_inset Index idx
12743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12744 Page breaks ! Clear
12752 \begin_layout Standard
12753 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12754 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12755 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12756 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12757 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12760 \begin_layout Standard
12761 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12763 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12764 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12766 \begin_inset space ~
12772 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12775 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12777 \begin_inset space ~
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12786 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12787 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12788 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
12792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12794 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
12795 Suppressing Page Breaks
12798 \begin_inset Index idx
12801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12803 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
12807 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
12816 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
12818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12820 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
12825 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
12829 \begin_layout Standard
12831 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
12832 To discourage page break at
12833 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
12835 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
12836 certain point you can use
12840 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12842 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
12845 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12847 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
12854 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
12855 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
12856 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
12857 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
12862 \begin_layout Subsection
12864 \begin_inset Index idx
12867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12876 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12883 \begin_layout Standard
12884 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12886 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12889 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12891 \begin_inset space ~
12895 \begin_inset space ~
12903 arg "newline-insert newline"
12907 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12910 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12916 \begin_inset space ~
12924 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12927 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12929 This is useful to avoid
12930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12937 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12940 \begin_layout Standard
12941 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12942 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12944 very good at line breaking.
12945 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12946 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12947 \begin_inset space ~
12951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12953 reference "sec:Quote"
12958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12960 reference "sec:Verse"
12965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12967 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12974 \begin_layout Subsection
12976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12978 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12983 \begin_inset Index idx
12986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12995 \begin_layout Standard
12997 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13008 \begin_layout Standard
13012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13013 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13015 \begin_inset space ~
13020 you can insert horizontal lines.
13021 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13022 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13023 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13026 \begin_layout Standard
13028 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13039 \begin_layout Section
13040 Characters and Symbols
13043 \begin_layout Standard
13044 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13045 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13046 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13054 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13058 for information on how this is done.
13061 \begin_layout Standard
13062 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13067 dialog via the menu
13069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13070 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13076 \begin_layout Standard
13077 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13085 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13086 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13088 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13096 \begin_layout Section
13097 Fonts and Text Styles
13098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13100 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13107 \begin_layout Subsection
13109 \begin_inset Index idx
13112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13121 \begin_layout Standard
13122 There are two types of fonts:
13125 \begin_layout Description
13127 \begin_inset space ~
13131 \begin_inset Index idx
13134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13140 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13145 characters) in the font.
13146 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13147 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13148 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13149 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13150 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13151 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13152 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13153 \begin_inset Newline newline
13156 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13157 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13158 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13159 sizes than at small ones.
13160 \begin_inset Newline newline
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13182 \begin_layout Description
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13188 \begin_inset Index idx
13191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13197 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13198 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13199 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13200 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13201 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13202 image manipulation program.
13203 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13204 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13208 pixels high up to 34
13209 \begin_inset space ~
13212 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13213 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13214 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13216 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13217 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13218 \begin_inset Newline newline
13221 Bitmap fonts are named
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13229 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13232 \begin_layout Standard
13233 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13234 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13235 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13236 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13237 use scalable fonts.
13240 \begin_layout Standard
13241 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13244 \begin_layout Standard
13245 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13247 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13249 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13252 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13253 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13254 font, to emphasize text you use an
13255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13263 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13265 In \SpecialChar LyX
13266 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13270 \begin_layout Subsection
13273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13275 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13284 used its own fonts.
13285 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13286 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13289 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13290 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13291 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13292 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13293 to a word processor.
13294 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13295 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13296 files are very portable across
13297 different machines.
13298 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13299 has increased a lot
13300 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13303 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13305 \begin_inset space ~
13309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13311 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13316 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13317 code in the document
13318 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13321 \begin_layout Standard
13322 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13323 engines that are also able directly
13324 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13326 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13328 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13330 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13331 that is installed on your system.
13332 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13335 \begin_layout Standard
13336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13344 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13345 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13353 \begin_layout Subsection
13354 Document Font and Font size
13355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13357 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13362 \begin_inset Index idx
13365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13372 \begin_inset Index idx
13375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13384 \begin_layout Standard
13385 You can set the document fonts in the
13387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13391 \begin_inset Index idx
13394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13395 Document ! Settings
13405 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13406 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13409 \begin_inset space ~
13418 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13420 \begin_inset space ~
13423 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13426 \begin_layout Standard
13431 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13432 This requires that you use
13444 as the output format, i.
13445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13449 \begin_inset space \space{}
13452 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13453 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13454 installed (see section
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13461 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13466 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13468 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13469 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13471 \begin_inset space ~
13474 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13475 cannot determine the family.
13476 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13477 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13480 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13483 \begin_layout Standard
13484 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13485 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13490 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13496 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13498 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13500 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13503 font encoding, this is
13504 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13505 , depending on the document language,
13508 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13509 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13533 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13534 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13556 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13577 European Computer Modern
13580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13588 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13591 \begin_layout Standard
13596 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13597 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13602 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13610 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13616 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13617 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13620 \begin_layout Itemize
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13629 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13647 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13648 community in order to replace
13652 as the default font.
13653 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13654 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13657 \begin_inset space ~
13670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13671 One difference is improved kerning.
13679 \begin_layout Itemize
13680 If you do not like the look of
13688 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13693 \begin_inset space ~
13699 \begin_inset space ~
13709 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13710 \begin_inset space ~
13713 serif and typewriter fonts,
13717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13718 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13725 \begin_inset space ~
13734 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13739 \begin_inset space \space{}
13747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13751 \begin_inset space \space{}
13757 \begin_inset space ~
13765 \begin_inset space ~
13775 but you can also select your own.
13776 \begin_inset Newline newline
13779 The differences between roman,
13782 \begin_inset space ~
13791 fonts are explained in section
13792 \begin_inset space ~
13796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13798 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13803 \begin_inset Newline newline
13809 \begin_inset space ~
13814 was originally designed for newspapers.
13815 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13816 into the small newspaper columns.
13820 \begin_inset space ~
13825 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13828 \begin_layout Standard
13829 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13842 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13847 depends on the class you are using.
13848 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13851 \begin_layout Standard
13852 Note that the font size is the
13857 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13858 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13859 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13860 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13863 \begin_inset space ~
13869 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13870 \begin_inset space ~
13874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13876 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13883 \begin_layout Standard
13887 \begin_inset space ~
13892 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13894 \begin_inset space ~
13897 serif or typewriter.
13902 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13912 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13915 \begin_layout Standard
13920 LaTeX font encoding
13922 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13923 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13929 \begin_inset Index idx
13932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13940 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13942 \begin_inset space ~
13946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13948 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13955 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13956 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13957 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13961 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13969 \begin_layout Standard
13970 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13972 Use Old Style Figures
13976 Use True Small Caps
13979 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13982 Use Old Style Figures
13984 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13986 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13994 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13998 Use True Small Caps
14000 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14001 of scaled capitals.
14002 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14003 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14004 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14008 \begin_layout Standard
14010 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14011 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14012 provided by the font package (or the
14016 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14021 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14027 \begin_layout Standard
14032 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14033 a font to display the script characters.
14037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14038 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14044 \begin_inset Index idx
14047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14054 So this has no effect for the document language
14070 \begin_layout Standard
14073 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14075 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14076 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14082 \begin_inset Index idx
14085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14087 packages ! microtype
14096 \begin_layout Standard
14099 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14101 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14106 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14107 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14113 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14114 \begin_inset space ~
14118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14120 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14130 \begin_layout Standard
14131 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14143 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14148 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14149 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14151 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14153 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14156 dialog, see section
14157 \begin_inset space ~
14161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14163 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14175 \begin_layout Subsection
14179 \begin_layout Standard
14180 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14181 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14183 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14184 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14185 choose a math font in the dialog
14187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14191 \begin_inset Index idx
14194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14195 Document ! Settings
14201 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14202 automatically selects a math font.
14203 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14204 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14213 \begin_inset space ~
14219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14224 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14225 document font is available.
14228 \begin_layout Standard
14229 Note that the math font will not be used for
14233 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14239 or by the insertion of the command
14246 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14247 \begin_inset space ~
14251 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14252 while the math characters do not.
14254 \begin_inset space ~
14257 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14260 \begin_inset space ~
14268 \begin_inset space ~
14273 in the document font settings.
14276 \begin_layout Standard
14277 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14278 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14279 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14280 font (in most cases
14281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14287 \begin_inset space ~
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14296 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14297 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14305 \begin_inset space ~
14311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14317 \begin_layout Subsection
14319 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14329 name "subsec:charstyles"
14336 \begin_inset Index idx
14339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14346 \begin_inset Index idx
14349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14358 \begin_layout Standard
14359 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14360 automatically changes the
14361 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14364 style for certain paragraph environments.
14366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14367 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14369 This is where we meet the concept of
14375 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14377 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14381 \begin_layout Standard
14383 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14388 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14403 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14412 e., available with all document classes.
14413 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14417 for specific purposes.
14418 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14421 \begin_layout Standard
14423 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14424 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14434 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14438 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14451 — you customized the
14456 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14457 among them, encourage the use of
14469 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14470 \begin_inset space ~
14474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14476 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14481 Rather than fiddling with
14485 , they encourage the use of
14489 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14494 \begin_inset Quotes els
14498 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14501 ), not their form (
14502 \begin_inset Quotes els
14506 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14510 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14511 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14512 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14513 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14514 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14515 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14521 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14525 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14526 With a semantic markup (such as
14530 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14535 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14537 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14538 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14541 \begin_layout Standard
14543 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14544 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14545 by \SpecialChar LyX
14551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14553 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14554 Builtin Text Styles
14555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14557 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14564 \begin_layout Standard
14566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14567 The two builtin text styles can be
14568 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14576 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14577 both of these styles
14580 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14588 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14594 \begin_layout Standard
14599 style, do one of the following:
14602 \begin_layout Itemize
14603 click on the toolbar button
14612 \begin_layout Itemize
14613 use the key binding
14620 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14624 \begin_layout Itemize
14626 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14634 arg "dialog-show character"
14640 arg "dialog-show character"
14643 ) as described in section
14644 \begin_inset space ~
14648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14650 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14659 \begin_layout Standard
14660 These commands are all toggles.
14665 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14668 \begin_layout Standard
14669 One typically uses the
14673 style for proper names.
14675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14682 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14688 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14692 \begin_layout Standard
14694 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14699 is producing text in
14703 , but the definition can be changed.
14708 \begin_layout Standard
14710 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14720 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14727 \begin_layout Itemize
14728 clicking on the toolbar button
14737 \begin_layout Itemize
14738 using the keybindings
14745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14749 \begin_layout Itemize
14751 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14759 arg "dialog-show character"
14765 arg "dialog-show character"
14768 ) as described in section
14769 \begin_inset space ~
14773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14775 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14784 \begin_layout Standard
14789 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14791 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14793 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14796 packages use a different font
14797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14798 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14804 \begin_layout Standard
14805 We've been using the
14809 style all over the place in this document.
14810 Here's one more example:
14813 \begin_layout Quotation
14817 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14819 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14825 \begin_layout Standard
14826 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14827 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14828 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14829 the common tendency to overuse
14830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14832 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14837 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14839 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14843 \begin_layout Standard
14845 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14846 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14847 only as font changes and integrated in the
14855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14858 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14865 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14867 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14871 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14874 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14876 \begin_inset space ~
14879 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14881 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14887 arg "dialog-show character"
14893 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14901 arg "dialog-show character"
14905 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14915 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14922 \begin_layout Standard
14924 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14925 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14927 \begin_inset space ~
14931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14933 reference "subsec:Modules"
14940 ), or local layout settings (see section
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14947 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14952 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14956 markup for specific functions.
14957 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14962 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14972 \begin_inset Quotes els
14976 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14982 \begin_layout Standard
14984 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14985 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14987 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14993 \begin_layout Standard
14995 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14996 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15001 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15002 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15003 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15008 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15009 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15014 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15022 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15023 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15024 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15025 \begin_inset Flex Code
15028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15030 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15039 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15044 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15053 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15058 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15067 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15068 on screen their formal appearance.
15073 \begin_layout Subsection
15075 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15087 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15089 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15097 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15103 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15108 \begin_inset Index idx
15111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15120 \begin_layout Standard
15121 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15125 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15127 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15134 the properties of text passages
15135 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15139 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15140 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15141 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15142 from ordinary dialog.
15143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15147 \begin_layout Standard
15149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15150 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15151 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15152 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15153 the properties of the respective text passages.
15158 comes in as a last resort.
15163 \begin_layout Standard
15164 Before we document how to
15165 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15166 use custom character style
15167 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15168 tweak the text properties
15170 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15171 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15177 \begin_inset Newline newline
15180 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15181 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15187 use custom character styles
15188 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15189 tweak text properties
15192 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15195 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15197 \begin_inset space ~
15200 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15202 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15208 arg "dialog-show character"
15213 dialog or press the toolbar button
15216 arg "dialog-show character"
15221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15224 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15225 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15227 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15230 property that you can choose.
15231 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15234 \begin_inset space ~
15239 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15241 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15245 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15247 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15252 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15253 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15254 environments all at once.
15257 \begin_layout Standard
15259 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15261 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15264 properties, and their options (in addition to
15267 \begin_inset space ~
15273 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15277 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15285 \begin_layout Labeling
15286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15300 The possible options are:
15304 \begin_layout Labeling
15305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15310 This is the Roman font family.
15311 Normally a serif font.
15312 It's also the default family.
15322 \begin_layout Labeling
15323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15327 \begin_inset space ~
15334 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15346 \begin_layout Labeling
15347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15354 This is the Typewriter font family.
15360 arg "font-typewriter"
15366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15370 \begin_layout Standard
15372 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15373 The general differences of these families are:
15376 \begin_layout Itemize
15378 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15383 fonts use characters with serifs.
15384 These are the small
15385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15392 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15393 The following example shows the difference:
15394 \begin_inset Newline newline
15398 \begin_inset Newline newline
15403 text without serifs
15406 \begin_inset Newline newline
15409 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15410 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15417 \begin_layout Itemize
15419 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15424 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15425 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15426 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15429 \begin_layout Itemize
15431 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15444 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15462 \begin_inset Newline newline
15466 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15471 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15484 \begin_inset Note Note
15487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15489 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15490 For more on phantoms see section
15491 \begin_inset space ~
15495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15497 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15507 \begin_inset Newline newline
15516 \begin_layout Labeling
15517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15522 This corresponds to the print weight.
15527 \begin_layout Labeling
15528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15533 This is the Medium font series.
15534 It's also the default series.
15537 \begin_layout Labeling
15538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15545 This is the Bold font series.
15558 \begin_layout Labeling
15559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15564 As the name implies.
15569 \begin_layout Labeling
15570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15575 This is the Upright font shape.
15576 It's also the default shape.
15579 \begin_layout Labeling
15580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15595 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15600 s the Italic font shape
15606 \begin_layout Labeling
15607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15614 This is the Slanted font shape
15616 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15617 , this is different from italic).
15620 \begin_layout Labeling
15621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15625 \begin_inset space ~
15632 This is the Small caps font shape
15639 \begin_layout Labeling
15640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15645 Alters the text color.
15646 Note that not all DVI
15647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15649 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15652 viewers are able to display colors.
15654 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15658 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15660 \begin_inset space ~
15667 , which means that the document default color set in
15669 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15670 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15676 \begin_inset space ~
15682 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15684 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15688 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15768 \begin_inset Index idx
15771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15778 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15784 \begin_layout Labeling
15785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15790 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15791 the language of the document.
15792 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15793 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15794 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15797 in blue to indicate the change
15798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15799 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15803 \begin_inset Newline newline
15806 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15808 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15809 When using the spell checking (see section
15810 \begin_inset space ~
15814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15816 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15820 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15821 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15823 \begin_inset Newline newline
15826 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15828 Exclude from Spellchecking
15831 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15834 \begin_layout Labeling
15835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15840 Alters the size of the font.
15842 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15844 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15848 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15851 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15852 document font size.
15853 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15854 the details, but a general description of what
15860 \begin_layout Labeling
15861 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15882 arg "font-size tiny"
15888 \begin_layout Labeling
15889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15910 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15916 \begin_layout Labeling
15917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15938 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15944 \begin_layout Labeling
15945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15966 arg "font-size small"
15972 \begin_layout Labeling
15973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15987 It's also the default size.
15991 arg "font-size normal"
15997 \begin_layout Labeling
15998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16019 arg "font-size large"
16025 \begin_layout Labeling
16026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16047 arg "font-size larger"
16053 \begin_layout Labeling
16054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16075 arg "font-size largest"
16081 \begin_layout Labeling
16082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16103 arg "font-size huge"
16109 \begin_layout Labeling
16110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16131 arg "font-size giant"
16137 \begin_layout Labeling
16138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16143 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16163 arg "font-size increase"
16169 \begin_layout Labeling
16170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16175 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16195 arg "font-size decrease"
16202 \begin_layout Standard
16207 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16208 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16210 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16211 — use those instead.
16212 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16215 \begin_layout Labeling
16216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16228 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16229 change a few other things at the character level
16230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16231 have text passages being underlined
16235 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16236 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16237 days, when you could not change fonts.
16238 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16239 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16240 because some people
16244 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16251 \begin_layout Labeling
16252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16254 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16261 This is text with emphasize on
16264 This might seem like the same as
16268 , but it is actually a bit different.
16274 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16276 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16277 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16281 \begin_layout Labeling
16282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16289 Don't use underlining.
16294 \begin_layout Labeling
16295 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16297 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16301 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16320 arg "font-underline"
16326 \begin_inset Newline newline
16330 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16333 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16334 when you could not change fonts.
16335 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16336 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16337 because some people
16341 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16346 \begin_layout Labeling
16347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16351 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16353 \begin_inset space ~
16362 This is text with Double under
16363 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16365 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16374 arg "font-underunderline"
16378 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16380 \begin_inset Newline newline
16383 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16384 about double underbar
16389 \begin_layout Labeling
16390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16394 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16396 \begin_inset space ~
16405 This is text with Wavy under
16406 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16408 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16417 arg "font-underwave"
16421 \begin_inset Newline newline
16424 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16425 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16426 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16431 \begin_layout Labeling
16432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16434 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16439 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16445 \begin_layout Labeling
16446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16448 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16453 Don't use strikethrough.
16456 \begin_layout Labeling
16457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16461 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16463 \begin_inset space ~
16467 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16475 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16478 Single strikethrough
16486 arg "font-strikeout"
16490 \begin_inset Newline newline
16493 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16494 changed in the meantime.
16497 \begin_layout Labeling
16498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16504 \begin_inset space ~
16508 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16510 \begin_inset space ~
16514 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16522 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16524 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16530 \begin_inset Newline newline
16533 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16537 \begin_layout Standard
16539 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16540 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16541 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16542 \begin_inset space ~
16546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16548 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16555 \begin_layout Itemize
16557 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16564 This is text with emphasize on
16569 \begin_layout Itemize
16573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16580 This is text with Noun on.
16582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16589 , this is a logical attribute.
16590 Normally it's equivalent to
16593 \begin_inset space ~
16603 \begin_layout Standard
16604 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16613 chosen a new character style
16614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16615 applied a text property
16618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16623 \begin_inset space ~
16626 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16634 arg "dialog-show character"
16642 arg "dialog-show character"
16645 ) dialog, the settings are
16646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16650 You can activate the
16651 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16653 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16654 last applied properties
16656 by using the toolbar button
16659 arg "textstyle-apply"
16663 The button lets you apply
16664 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16665 your custom character style
16666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16669 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16671 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16672 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16673 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16674 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16679 \begin_layout Standard
16680 To completely reset the
16681 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16684 text properties of a selection
16686 to the default, use
16687 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16689 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16699 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16704 from the menu of the toolbar button
16707 arg "textstyle-apply"
16714 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16715 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16716 you just set the shape to
16717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16735 \begin_inset space ~
16749 \begin_layout Standard
16751 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16752 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16760 \begin_inset space ~
16772 \begin_layout Itemize
16774 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16787 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16805 \begin_inset Newline newline
16809 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16823 \begin_inset Note Note
16826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16827 For more on phantoms see section
16828 \begin_inset space ~
16832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16834 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16844 \begin_inset Newline newline
16850 \begin_layout Itemize
16852 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16857 fonts use characters with serifs.
16858 These are the small
16859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16866 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16867 The following example shows the difference:
16868 \begin_inset Newline newline
16872 \begin_inset Newline newline
16877 text without serifs
16880 \begin_inset Newline newline
16883 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16884 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16891 \begin_layout Itemize
16893 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16898 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16899 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16900 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16905 \begin_layout Standard
16907 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16915 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16916 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16919 \begin_inset space ~
16924 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16925 the property to be removed.
16926 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16927 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16928 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16946 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16947 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16955 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16959 \begin_inset space ~
16964 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16975 If you, for example, set
16976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16994 \begin_inset space ~
16999 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17008 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17013 \begin_layout Standard
17015 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17018 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17019 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17022 \begin_layout Section
17023 Printing and Previewing
17026 \begin_layout Subsection
17030 \begin_layout Standard
17031 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17032 using \SpecialChar LyX
17033 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17034 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17035 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17036 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17038 Additional Features
17043 \begin_layout Standard
17045 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17048 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17049 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17050 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17053 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17054 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17055 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17056 to turn your writing into printable output.
17057 This happens in two stages:
17060 \begin_layout Enumerate
17061 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17062 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17064 a file with the extension,
17065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17079 \begin_layout Enumerate
17080 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17081 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17082 to use the commands in the
17086 file to produce printable output.
17089 \begin_layout Subsection
17090 Output file formats
17091 \begin_inset Index idx
17094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17103 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17112 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17114 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17118 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17122 \begin_inset Index idx
17125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17127 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17129 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17140 \begin_layout Standard
17141 This file type has the extension
17142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17154 It contains your document as plain text
17155 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17157 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17158 following the rules of the
17159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17162 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17172 You can export your document to
17173 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17175 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17180 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17181 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17183 \begin_inset space ~
17189 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17190 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17191 bibliography (section
17192 \begin_inset space ~
17196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17198 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17203 If your document includes such material, use
17205 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17206 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17208 \begin_inset space ~
17212 \begin_inset space ~
17216 \begin_inset space ~
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17234 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17235 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17236 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17238 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17247 \begin_inset Index idx
17250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17251 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 This file type has the extension
17262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17273 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17276 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17277 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17278 -Errors or to process it manually
17279 with console commands.
17280 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17281 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17282 's temporary directory whenever you
17283 view or export your document.
17286 \begin_layout Standard
17287 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17288 -file using the menu
17290 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17291 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17296 export variants are explained in section
17297 \begin_inset space ~
17301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17303 reference "subsec:Export"
17310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17312 \begin_inset Index idx
17315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 \begin_layout Standard
17325 This file type has the extension
17326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17346 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17347 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17348 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17352 \begin_layout Standard
17353 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17354 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17355 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17356 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17357 when you view the DVI.
17358 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17361 \begin_layout Standard
17362 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17364 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17365 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17370 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17371 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17379 The latter option uses the program
17381 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17387 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17390 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17391 font access (see section
17392 \begin_inset space ~
17396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17398 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17403 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17404 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17411 \begin_inset Index idx
17414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17415 File formats ! PostScript
17423 \begin_layout Standard
17424 This file type has the extension
17425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17437 PostScript was developed by the company
17441 as a printer language.
17442 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17444 PostScript can be seen as a
17445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17448 programming language
17449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17452 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17457 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17464 \begin_inset Index idx
17467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17469 packages ! pstricks
17479 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17487 Encapsulated PostScript
17488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17491 (EPS, file extension
17492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17504 As \SpecialChar LyX
17505 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17506 convert them in the background to EPS.
17507 If, for example, you have 50
17508 \begin_inset space ~
17511 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17513 \begin_inset space ~
17516 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17517 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17519 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17520 EPS to avoid this problem.
17523 \begin_layout Standard
17524 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17526 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17527 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17535 \begin_inset Index idx
17538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17545 \begin_inset Index idx
17548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 \begin_layout Standard
17558 This file type has the extension
17559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17575 Portable Document Format
17576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17583 was derived from PostScript.
17584 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17593 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17594 looks exactly the same.
17597 \begin_layout Standard
17598 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17602 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17606 (JPG, file extension
17607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17634 Portable Network Graphics
17635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17638 (PNG, file extension
17639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17651 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17652 converts them in the
17653 background to one of these formats.
17654 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17655 will slow down your workflow.
17656 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17659 \begin_layout Standard
17660 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17662 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17668 \begin_layout Description
17670 \begin_inset space ~
17673 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17677 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17680 \begin_layout Description
17682 \begin_inset space ~
17689 ) This uses the program
17691 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17694 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17697 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17700 is a new engine, derived from
17704 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17705 access (see section
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17712 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17717 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17718 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17723 \begin_layout Description
17725 \begin_inset space ~
17732 ) This uses the program
17737 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17743 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17744 font access (see section
17745 \begin_inset space ~
17749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17751 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17756 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17757 vertically written Japanese.
17760 \begin_layout Description
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17765 (cropped) This is the same as
17768 \begin_inset space ~
17773 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17774 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17775 to generate good-looking
17776 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17779 \begin_layout Description
17781 \begin_inset space ~
17784 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17788 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17792 \begin_layout Description
17794 \begin_inset space ~
17797 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17801 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17802 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17806 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17807 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17810 \begin_layout Standard
17814 \begin_inset space ~
17823 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17824 works without problems.
17825 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17826 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17830 \begin_inset space ~
17838 \begin_inset space ~
17843 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17853 \begin_inset Index idx
17856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17857 FileFormats ! XHTML
17863 \begin_inset Index idx
17866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17875 \begin_layout Standard
17876 This file type has the extension
17877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17889 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17890 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17891 When \SpecialChar LyX
17892 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17893 suitable for the purpose.
17894 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17900 between different formats, which are described in section
17902 Math Output in XHTML
17907 \begin_inset space ~
17915 \begin_layout Standard
17916 XHTML output remains
17917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17924 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17925 features are supported yet.
17929 and the World Wide Web
17933 Additional Features
17935 manual, for more information.
17938 \begin_layout Standard
17939 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17941 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17942 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17948 \begin_layout Subsection
17950 \begin_inset Index idx
17953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 \begin_layout Standard
17963 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17964 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17973 or use the toolbar button
17980 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17981 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17982 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17988 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17992 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17994 \begin_inset space ~
17998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18000 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18005 Further output formats can be selected via
18007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18008 View (Other Formats)
18010 or the toolbar button
18019 \begin_layout Standard
18020 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18021 viewer window using the menu
18023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18029 Update (Other Formats)
18034 \begin_layout Standard
18035 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18038 To have a real output, export your document.
18041 \begin_layout Section
18042 A few Words about Typography
18043 \begin_inset Index idx
18046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18055 \begin_layout Subsection
18056 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18057 \begin_inset Index idx
18060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18067 \begin_inset Index idx
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 \begin_layout Standard
18080 In \SpecialChar LyX
18082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18093 symbol comes in four variants: the
18110 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18116 \begin_layout Standard
18117 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18127 height_special "totalheight"
18132 backgroundcolor "none"
18135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18136 \begin_inset Tabular
18137 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18138 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18139 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18140 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18141 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18142 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18171 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18211 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18212 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 system key combination
18238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18239 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18251 and the em dash with
18254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18267 is the Mac label for the right
18277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18290 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18313 system key combination or
18314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18341 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18380 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18386 \begin_layout Standard
18387 Dashes can also be inserted with
18389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18391 \begin_inset space ~
18394 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18402 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18403 and 2014 for the en dash).
18406 \begin_layout Standard
18407 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18408 mode and has a length of its own.
18409 Here are some examples:
18412 \begin_layout Enumerate
18413 line- and page-breaks
18414 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18424 \begin_layout Enumerate
18426 \begin_inset space ~
18430 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18440 \begin_layout Enumerate
18441 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18452 \begin_layout Enumerate
18453 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18467 \begin_layout Standard
18469 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18471 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18472 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18480 \begin_layout Subsection
18481 Dashes and Line Breaks
18482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18484 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18491 \begin_layout Standard
18492 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18493 case and locale, e.
18494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18500 \begin_layout Itemize
18501 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18502 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18505 \begin_layout Itemize
18506 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18510 \begin_layout Itemize
18511 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18512 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18517 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18528 allows line breaks after hyphens
18529 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18531 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18534 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18537 \begin_layout Enumerate
18538 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18539 \begin_inset space ~
18542 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18544 The Elements of Typographic Style
18547 \begin_inset space ~
18550 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18553 \begin_layout Enumerate
18554 Unwanted line breaks
18559 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18561 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18564 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18571 Prevent Hyphenation
18576 \begin_inset space ~
18592 in \SpecialChar TeX
18594 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18595 , a protected space does not suffice
18599 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18606 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18607 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18608 in the document language.
18609 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18623 \begin_layout Itemize
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18629 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18639 height_special "totalheight"
18644 backgroundcolor "none"
18647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18656 \begin_layout Itemize
18658 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18668 height_special "totalheight"
18673 backgroundcolor "none"
18676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18686 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18690 – sont très utiles.
18693 \begin_layout Itemize
18698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18711 \begin_layout Standard
18712 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18713 \begin_inset space ~
18716 – in contrast to an overfull line
18717 \begin_inset space ~
18720 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18724 \begin_layout Standard
18725 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18729 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18730 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18731 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18736 \begin_layout Enumerate
18737 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18738 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18739 or \SpecialChar TeX
18745 \begin_layout Itemize
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18750 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18754 – sont très utiles.
18758 \begin_layout Enumerate
18759 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18760 \begin_inset Newline newline
18765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18768 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18770 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18772 \begin_inset space ~
18778 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18780 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18782 \begin_inset space ~
18793 \begin_layout Itemize
18794 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18795 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18796 should be followed by
18797 a line break opportunity.
18800 \begin_layout Standard
18801 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18802 \begin_inset space ~
18806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18808 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18819 \begin_layout Enumerate
18820 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18821 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18822 or en dashes (see section
18823 \begin_inset space ~
18827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18829 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18840 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
18843 \begin_layout Standard
18844 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18846 \begin_inset space ~
18849 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18850 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18859 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18860 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18868 \begin_layout Standard
18869 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18871 \begin_inset space ~
18874 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18876 prevents ligation to dashes.
18878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18885 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18890 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18891 after the input (unless the current text font is
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 The behavior was changed since
18901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18916 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18917 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18918 as non-breakable dashes.
18919 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18927 \begin_layout Standard
18930 \begin_inset space ~
18938 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18940 \begin_inset space ~
18943 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18948 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18949 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18951 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18955 If you used both literal and
18956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18963 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18965 \begin_inset space ~
18968 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18969 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18972 \begin_layout Subsection
18974 \begin_inset Index idx
18977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18986 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18993 \begin_layout Standard
18994 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18995 but automatically in the output.
18996 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19002 \begin_inset Index idx
19005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 following the rules of the document language.
19014 does not hyphenate text in the
19018 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19021 \begin_layout Standard
19023 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19027 font and with unusual constructs, like
19028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19036 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19037 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19038 This is done with the menu
19040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19041 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19043 \begin_inset space ~
19049 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19051 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19055 \begin_layout Standard
19056 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19057 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19068 would then see the hyphen
19069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19076 as a line break possibility.
19077 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19078 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19081 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19082 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19085 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19087 Prevent Hyphenation
19092 \begin_inset space ~
19100 \begin_layout Subsection
19102 \begin_inset Index idx
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19114 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19115 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19118 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19125 \begin_layout Standard
19126 When \SpecialChar LyX
19127 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19128 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19130 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19136 appropriate amount of space.
19137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19140 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19142 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19143 gets after another word.
19146 \begin_layout Standard
19147 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19148 not work in all cases.
19150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19161 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19162 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19165 \begin_layout Standard
19166 Here are some examples of
19170 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19173 \begin_layout Itemize
19178 \begin_layout Itemize
19183 \begin_layout Standard
19184 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19187 \begin_layout Itemize
19189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19193 this is too much space!
19196 \begin_layout Itemize
19201 \begin_layout Standard
19202 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19205 \begin_layout Standard
19206 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19209 \begin_layout Enumerate
19213 \begin_inset space ~
19218 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19219 \begin_inset space ~
19223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19225 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19230 \begin_inset Index idx
19233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19234 Spaces ! inter-word
19242 \begin_layout Enumerate
19246 \begin_inset space ~
19251 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19252 \begin_inset space ~
19256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19258 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19263 \begin_inset Index idx
19266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 \begin_layout Enumerate
19279 \begin_inset space ~
19283 \begin_inset space ~
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19296 \begin_inset space ~
19301 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19302 This function is also bound to
19305 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19311 \begin_layout Standard
19312 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19315 \begin_layout Itemize
19317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19321 \begin_inset space \space{}
19324 this is too much space!
19327 \begin_layout Itemize
19328 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19332 \begin_layout Standard
19333 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19334 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19336 will take care of this.
19339 \begin_layout Standard
19340 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19344 \begin_inset space ~
19350 feature described in the section
19352 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19357 Additional Features
19362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19364 \begin_inset Index idx
19367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19368 Typography ! Quotation marks
19374 \begin_inset Index idx
19377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19378 Quotation marks | see
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19408 \begin_layout Standard
19410 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19411 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19412 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19422 The keyboard character,
19426 , generates this automatically.
19429 \begin_layout Standard
19430 You can specify what character the
19434 key produces by using the submenu
19440 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19444 \begin_inset Index idx
19447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 Document ! Settings
19453 dialog and switching the
19457 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19458 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19460 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19462 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19466 \begin_inset space ~
19472 \begin_layout Labeling
19473 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19485 \begin_inset space ~
19489 \begin_inset space ~
19493 \begin_inset Quotes els
19497 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19511 \begin_inset Quotes els
19515 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19518 quotation marks (as common, e.
19519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19525 \begin_layout Labeling
19526 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19529 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19533 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19537 \begin_inset space ~
19541 \begin_inset space ~
19545 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19549 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19555 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19559 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19563 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19567 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19570 quotation marks (as common, e.
19571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19577 \begin_layout Labeling
19578 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19581 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19585 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19589 \begin_inset space ~
19593 \begin_inset space ~
19597 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19601 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19607 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19611 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19615 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19619 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19622 quotation marks (as common, e.
19623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19629 \begin_layout Labeling
19630 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19633 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19637 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19641 \begin_inset space ~
19645 \begin_inset space ~
19649 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19653 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19659 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19663 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19667 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19671 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19674 quotation marks (as common, e.
19675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19681 \begin_layout Labeling
19682 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19685 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19689 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19693 \begin_inset space ~
19697 \begin_inset space ~
19701 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19705 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19711 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19715 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19719 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19723 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19726 quotation marks (as common, e.
19727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19730 g., in Switzerland)
19733 \begin_layout Labeling
19734 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19737 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19741 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19745 \begin_inset space ~
19749 \begin_inset space ~
19753 \begin_inset Quotes als
19757 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19763 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19767 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19771 \begin_inset Quotes als
19775 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19778 quotation marks (as common, e.
19779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19785 \begin_layout Labeling
19786 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19789 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19793 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19797 \begin_inset space ~
19801 \begin_inset space ~
19805 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19809 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19815 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19819 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19823 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19827 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19830 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19833 \begin_layout Labeling
19834 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19837 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19841 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19845 \begin_inset space ~
19849 \begin_inset space ~
19853 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19857 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19863 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19867 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19871 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19875 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19878 quotation marks (as common, e.
19879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19882 g., in Great Britain)
19885 \begin_layout Labeling
19886 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19889 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19893 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19897 \begin_inset space ~
19901 \begin_inset space ~
19905 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19909 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19915 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19919 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19923 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19927 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19930 quotation marks (as common, e.
19931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19937 \begin_layout Labeling
19938 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19941 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19945 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19949 \begin_inset space ~
19953 \begin_inset space ~
19957 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19961 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19967 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19971 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19975 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19979 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19982 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19988 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19989 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19990 the inner marks differ).
19998 \begin_layout Labeling
19999 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20002 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20006 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20010 \begin_inset space ~
20014 \begin_inset space ~
20018 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20022 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20028 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20032 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20036 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20040 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20043 quotation marks (as common, e.
20044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20050 \begin_layout Labeling
20051 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20054 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20058 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20062 \begin_inset space ~
20066 \begin_inset space ~
20070 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20074 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20080 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20084 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20088 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20092 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20095 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20096 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20100 \begin_layout Labeling
20101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20103 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20106 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20110 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20114 \begin_inset space ~
20118 \begin_inset space ~
20122 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20126 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20134 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20142 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20150 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20158 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20163 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20168 \begin_layout Labeling
20169 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20170 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20178 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20184 \begin_inset space ~
20188 \begin_inset space ~
20194 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20202 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20206 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20210 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20214 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20218 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20221 quotation marks (as common, e.
20222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20234 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20240 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20241 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20249 \begin_layout Labeling
20250 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20251 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20259 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20265 \begin_inset space ~
20269 \begin_inset space ~
20275 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20283 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20287 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20291 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20295 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20299 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20302 quotation marks (as common, e.
20303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20306 g., in North Korea and China)
20307 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20309 \begin_inset script superscript
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20316 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20331 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20338 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20348 \begin_layout Standard
20349 Inner quotation marks
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20355 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20356 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20364 does not necessarily mean
20365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20373 This is why we call them
20374 \begin_inset Quotes els
20378 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20394 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20396 \begin_inset Quotes els
20400 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20403 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20406 arg "quote-insert inner"
20411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20417 \begin_layout Standard
20418 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20419 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20420 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20421 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20422 If you check the setting
20424 Use dynamic quotation marks
20428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20432 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20433 they appear in a special color).
20434 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20435 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20440 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20443 \begin_layout Standard
20444 Individual quotation marks (i.
20445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20448 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20449 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20453 \begin_layout Subsection
20455 \begin_inset Index idx
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20459 Typography ! Ligatures
20465 \begin_inset Index idx
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20499 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20506 \begin_layout Standard
20507 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20508 print them as single characters.
20509 These groups are known as
20514 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20515 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20517 Here are the standard ligatures:
20520 \begin_layout Itemize
20524 \begin_layout Itemize
20528 \begin_layout Itemize
20532 \begin_layout Itemize
20536 \begin_layout Itemize
20540 \begin_layout Standard
20541 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20544 \begin_layout Standard
20545 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20546 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20554 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20570 To break a ligature, use
20572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20573 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20575 \begin_inset space ~
20582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20593 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20610 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20618 \begin_layout Subsection
20620 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20622 \begin_inset Index idx
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 \begin_layout Standard
20638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20639 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20643 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20646 \begin_layout Description
20648 The name of the game.
20651 \begin_layout Description
20653 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20657 \begin_layout Description
20659 The \SpecialChar TeX
20660 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20664 \begin_layout Description
20665 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20666 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20670 \begin_layout Standard
20671 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20677 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20685 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20686 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20687 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20688 converges to the number
20689 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20692 : The actual version is
20693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20701 , the previous one was
20702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20713 \begin_layout Subsection
20715 \begin_inset Index idx
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 \begin_layout Standard
20728 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20729 space between two words.
20730 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20740 for units use the menu
20742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20743 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20745 \begin_inset space ~
20753 arg "space-insert thin"
20759 \begin_layout Standard
20760 Here is an example to show the differences:
20763 \begin_layout Standard
20764 \begin_inset Tabular
20765 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20766 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20767 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20768 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 \begin_inset space ~
20779 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 space between number and unit
20798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20807 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 half space between number and unit
20832 \begin_layout Subsection
20834 \begin_inset Index idx
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20846 \begin_layout Standard
20847 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20849 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20850 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20851 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20852 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20853 These bits of text became known as
20864 \begin_layout Standard
20865 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20866 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20867 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20868 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20869 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20870 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20871 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20872 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20873 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20874 \begin_inset Newline newline
20882 \begin_inset Newline newline
20890 \begin_inset Newline newline
20893 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20894 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20895 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20897 \begin_inset space ~
20901 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20903 key "latexcompanion"
20909 \begin_inset space ~
20913 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20920 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20921 's page break mechanism.
20924 \begin_layout Chapter
20925 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20928 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20935 \begin_layout Standard
20936 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20939 \begin_inset space ~
20945 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20948 \begin_layout Section
20950 \begin_inset Index idx
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20969 \begin_layout Standard
20971 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20974 \begin_layout Description
20977 \begin_inset space ~
20980 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20981 \begin_inset Newline newline
20985 \begin_inset Note Note
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20997 \begin_layout Description
20998 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20999 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21000 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21003 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21004 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21006 \begin_inset space ~
21012 \begin_inset Newline newline
21016 \begin_inset Note Comment
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21029 \begin_layout Description
21031 \begin_inset space ~
21034 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21035 set in the document settings under
21037 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21039 \begin_inset space ~
21045 \begin_inset Newline newline
21049 \begin_inset Newline newline
21053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21063 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21068 of a comment that appears in the output.
21074 \begin_inset Newline newline
21078 \begin_inset Newline newline
21081 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21084 \begin_layout Standard
21085 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21097 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21100 \begin_layout Section
21102 \begin_inset Index idx
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21114 name "sec:Footnotes"
21121 \begin_layout Standard
21123 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21129 or the toolbar button
21132 arg "footnote-insert"
21144 \begin_inset Graphics
21145 filename clipart/footnote.png
21154 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21155 's representation of your footnote.
21165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21184 label, the box will
21188 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21189 Clicking on the box label again will close
21202 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21203 and click on the footnote
21218 \begin_layout Standard
21219 Here is an example footnote:
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21236 \begin_layout Standard
21237 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21238 position where the footnote box is placed.
21239 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21240 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21241 according to the document class.
21243 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21244 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21250 ey are described in the
21253 \begin_inset space ~
21261 \begin_layout Section
21263 \begin_inset Index idx
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21275 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21282 \begin_layout Standard
21283 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21285 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21289 \begin_inset space ~
21294 or the toolbar button
21297 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21323 appearing within your text.
21324 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21325 's representation of your margin
21334 \begin_layout Standard
21335 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21339 \begin_inset Marginal
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 This is a marginal note.
21352 \begin_layout Standard
21353 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21354 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21355 pages, right on odd pages.
21358 \begin_layout Standard
21359 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21362 \begin_inset space ~
21370 \begin_inset space ~
21378 \begin_layout Section
21379 Graphics and Images
21380 \begin_inset Index idx
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 \begin_inset Index idx
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21402 name "sec:Graphics"
21409 \begin_layout Standard
21410 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21411 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21414 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21423 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21426 \begin_layout Standard
21427 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21432 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21433 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21435 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21436 \begin_inset space ~
21440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21442 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21449 \begin_layout Standard
21454 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21455 of the image in the output.
21456 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21460 \begin_inset space ~
21464 \begin_inset space ~
21473 \begin_inset space ~
21477 \begin_inset space ~
21481 \begin_inset space ~
21486 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21487 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21495 \begin_layout Standard
21499 \begin_inset space ~
21503 \begin_inset space ~
21508 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21509 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21511 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21516 \begin_inset space ~
21521 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21522 with the image size is printed.
21525 \begin_layout Standard
21526 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21527 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21529 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21532 \begin_layout Standard
21534 \begin_inset Graphics
21535 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21543 \begin_layout Standard
21544 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21545 the image into a float, see section
21546 \begin_inset space ~
21550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21552 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21559 \begin_layout Subsection
21561 \begin_inset Index idx
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21573 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21580 \begin_layout Standard
21581 You can insert images in any known file format.
21582 But as we explained in section
21583 \begin_inset space ~
21587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21589 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21593 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21595 therefore uses the program
21599 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21600 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21601 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21602 \begin_inset space ~
21606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21608 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21615 \begin_layout Standard
21616 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21619 \begin_layout Description
21621 \begin_inset space ~
21624 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21625 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21626 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21630 Graphics Interchange Format
21631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21634 (GIF, file extension
21635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21647 \begin_inset Index idx
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21682 Portable Network Graphics
21683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21686 (PNG, file extension
21687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21699 \begin_inset Index idx
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21734 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21738 (JPG, file extension
21739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21763 \begin_inset Index idx
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 \begin_layout Description
21799 \begin_inset space ~
21802 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21804 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21805 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21806 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21807 \begin_inset Newline newline
21810 Scalable image formats can be
21811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21814 Scalable Vector Graphics
21815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21818 (SVG, file extension
21819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21831 \begin_inset Index idx
21834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21866 Encapsulated PostScript
21867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21870 (EPS, file extension
21871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21883 \begin_inset Index idx
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21918 Portable Document Format
21919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21922 (PDF, file extension
21923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21935 \begin_inset Index idx
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21953 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21954 result will not be scalable.
21955 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21969 \begin_layout Standard
21970 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21977 \begin_layout Subsection
21978 Grouping of Image Settings
21979 \begin_inset Index idx
21982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 Images ! Settings grouping
21991 \begin_layout Standard
21992 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21994 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21995 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21997 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21998 need to manually change each of them.
22001 \begin_layout Standard
22002 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22005 \begin_inset space ~
22009 \begin_inset space ~
22021 \begin_inset space ~
22025 \begin_inset space ~
22031 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22032 and checking the name of the desired group.
22035 \begin_layout Section
22037 \begin_inset Index idx
22040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22056 \begin_layout Standard
22057 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22060 arg "tabular-insert"
22065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22069 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22070 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22071 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22074 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22075 from the rest of the table.
22076 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22077 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22079 Here is an example table:
22082 \begin_layout Standard
22084 \begin_inset Tabular
22085 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22086 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22090 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22288 \begin_layout Standard
22290 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22291 This corresponds to the
22292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22299 table style listed in the style selection.
22302 \begin_layout Standard
22304 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22305 Other available styles include:
22308 \begin_layout Itemize
22310 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22319 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22323 \begin_layout Itemize
22325 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22326 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22329 \begin_layout Itemize
22331 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22340 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22341 bold top/bottom lines (see
22352 \begin_layout Standard
22354 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22355 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22356 button can be changed in
22358 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22359 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22363 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22367 \begin_layout Subsection
22371 \begin_layout Standard
22372 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22375 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22379 This brings up the table dialog.
22380 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22381 cursor is placed currently.
22382 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22383 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22384 done on all of your selection.
22387 \begin_layout Standard
22388 In addition to the table dialog, the
22391 \begin_inset space ~
22396 helps you in setting table properties.
22397 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22400 \begin_layout Standard
22404 \begin_inset space ~
22409 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22410 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22411 current cell respectively.
22412 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22414 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22415 of text, see section
22416 \begin_inset space ~
22420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22422 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22429 \begin_layout Standard
22430 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22431 using the check box
22440 This will merge the cells to
22444 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22445 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22446 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22447 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22448 in the last row without the upper border:
22451 \begin_layout Standard
22453 \begin_inset Tabular
22454 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22455 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22456 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22457 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22459 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 \begin_layout Standard
22591 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22592 -arguments for the table.
22593 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22594 explained in the chapter
22601 \begin_inset space ~
22607 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22608 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22609 but are visible in the output.
22612 \begin_layout Standard
22613 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 Most DVI-viewers are
22625 able to display rotations.
22633 \begin_layout Standard
22638 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22643 adds lines for all cell borders.
22646 \begin_layout Subsection
22648 \begin_inset Index idx
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22652 Tables ! Multi-page
22658 \begin_inset Index idx
22661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 \begin_layout Standard
22671 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22674 \begin_inset space ~
22678 \begin_inset space ~
22686 \begin_inset space ~
22691 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22692 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22695 \begin_layout Description
22700 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22701 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22702 Except for the first page, if
22705 \begin_inset space ~
22713 \begin_layout Description
22717 \begin_inset space ~
22722 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22723 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22726 \begin_layout Description
22731 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22732 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22733 except for the last page, if
22736 \begin_inset space ~
22744 \begin_layout Description
22748 \begin_inset space ~
22753 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22754 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22757 \begin_layout Description
22758 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22759 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22765 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22768 \begin_inset space ~
22776 \begin_layout Standard
22777 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22778 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22779 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22785 In this context, first means first in this order:
22788 \begin_inset space ~
22800 \begin_inset space ~
22805 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22808 \begin_layout Standard
22810 \begin_inset Tabular
22811 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22812 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22813 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22814 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22815 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22816 <row endfirsthead="true">
22817 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22828 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22837 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <row endfirsthead="true">
22848 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22868 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <row endhead="true">
22881 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <row endhead="true">
22912 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22923 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <row endfoot="true">
22945 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22956 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 <row endlastfoot="true">
24927 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 \begin_layout Subsection
24966 \begin_inset Index idx
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24978 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24985 \begin_layout Standard
24986 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24987 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24988 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24989 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24993 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24996 \begin_layout Standard
24997 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24998 for the column in the table dialog.
24999 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25000 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25004 \begin_layout Standard
25006 \begin_inset Tabular
25007 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25008 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25009 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25010 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25011 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25031 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 This is longer now.
25161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25213 This is longer now.
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 \begin_layout Standard
25245 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25246 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25252 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25257 Selection with the mouse or with
25261 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25262 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25263 the selection from outside the table.
25266 \begin_layout Section
25268 \begin_inset Index idx
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25287 \begin_layout Subsection
25291 \begin_layout Standard
25292 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25293 have a fixed location.
25295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25302 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25310 \begin_inset space ~
25315 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25316 too many notes on the current page.
25319 \begin_layout Standard
25320 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25321 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25322 and pages without text.
25323 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25324 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25325 Floats are therefore numbered.
25326 Referencing is described in section
25327 \begin_inset space ~
25331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25333 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25340 \begin_layout Standard
25341 To insert a float, use the menu
25343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25347 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25348 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25350 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25351 \begin_inset Index idx
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25361 paragraph within the float.
25362 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25363 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25364 left-clicking on the box label.
25365 A closed float box looks like this:
25366 \begin_inset Graphics
25367 filename clipart/float.png
25372 – a gray button with a red label.
25375 \begin_layout Standard
25376 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25378 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25381 \begin_layout Subsection
25383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25385 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25390 \begin_inset Index idx
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25394 Floats ! Figure floats
25402 \begin_layout Standard
25404 \begin_inset space ~
25408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25410 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25414 was created using the menu
25416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25417 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25423 arg "float-insert figure"
25427 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25436 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25440 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25441 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25445 \begin_inset space ~
25453 arg "layout-paragraph"
25459 \begin_layout Standard
25460 \begin_inset Float figure
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 \begin_inset Graphics
25470 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25480 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25485 name "fig:A-star-in"
25502 \begin_layout Standard
25503 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25504 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25515 ) and refer to it using the menu
25517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25523 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25527 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25528 vague references like
25529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25536 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25537 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25547 For more about cross-references, see section
25548 \begin_inset space ~
25552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25554 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25561 \begin_layout Standard
25562 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25563 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25564 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25565 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25566 as described in section
25567 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25573 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25579 \begin_inset space ~
25583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25585 reference "fig:Two-images"
25589 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25590 You can also set the images one below the other.
25592 \begin_inset space ~
25596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25598 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25605 reference "fig:Star"
25609 are the subfigures.
25612 \begin_layout Standard
25613 \begin_inset Float figure
25620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25621 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25625 \begin_inset Float figure
25632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25638 name "fig:Undefinable"
25650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25651 \begin_inset Graphics
25652 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25664 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25668 \begin_inset Float figure
25675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25694 \begin_inset Graphics
25695 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25707 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25719 name "fig:Two-images"
25736 \begin_layout Subsection
25738 \begin_inset Index idx
25741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25742 Floats ! Table floats
25750 \begin_layout Standard
25751 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25754 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25757 or the toolbar button
25760 arg "float-insert table"
25764 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25765 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25766 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25768 \begin_inset space ~
25772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25774 reference "tab:Table-float"
25781 \begin_layout Standard
25782 \begin_inset Float table
25789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25795 name "tab:Table-float"
25807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 \begin_inset Tabular
25810 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25811 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25813 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25814 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25941 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25962 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25965 \end{array}\right]$
25973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25986 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26007 \begin_layout Subsection
26009 \begin_inset Index idx
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26021 \begin_layout Standard
26023 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26024 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26025 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26027 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26035 \begin_inset space ~
26043 \begin_layout Section
26045 \begin_inset Index idx
26048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26057 \begin_layout Standard
26059 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26061 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26062 \begin_inset space \space{}
26068 \begin_layout Standard
26069 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26070 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26076 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26077 and its alignment within the page.
26080 \begin_layout Standard
26082 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26092 height_special "totalheight"
26097 backgroundcolor "none"
26100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26103 This is a minipage.
26104 The text is set in an italic style.
26107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26110 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26111 another formatting.
26119 \begin_layout Standard
26120 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26123 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26127 as described in section
26128 \begin_inset space ~
26132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26134 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26139 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26156 height_special "totalheight"
26161 backgroundcolor "none"
26164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26165 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26166 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26172 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26176 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26186 height_special "totalheight"
26191 backgroundcolor "none"
26194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26195 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26196 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26204 \begin_layout Standard
26205 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26211 \begin_layout Standard
26212 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26214 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26221 \begin_inset space ~
26229 \begin_layout Chapter
26230 Mathematical Formulas
26231 \begin_inset Index idx
26234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26241 \begin_inset Index idx
26244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26275 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26283 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26288 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26291 \begin_layout Section
26293 \begin_inset Index idx
26296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 \begin_layout Standard
26306 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26319 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26321 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26322 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26323 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26325 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26331 \begin_layout Standard
26332 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26336 \begin_inset space ~
26341 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26344 \begin_layout Standard
26345 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26346 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26349 \begin_layout Standard
26350 This is a line with an inline formula
26351 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26357 \begin_layout Standard
26358 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26359 paragraph, like this one:
26360 \begin_inset Formula
26367 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26370 \begin_layout Standard
26372 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26374 For example, typing
26375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26388 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26389 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26393 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26396 \begin_inset space ~
26404 \begin_layout Subsection
26405 Navigating in Formulas
26406 \begin_inset Index idx
26409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 \begin_layout Standard
26419 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26420 achieved with the arrow keys.
26422 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26423 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26428 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26429 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26433 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26437 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26440 \end{array}\right]$
26448 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26453 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26454 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26457 \begin_layout Standard
26462 , printed in this document as
26463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26467 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26474 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26475 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26476 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26481 For example, if you want
26482 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26490 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26500 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26504 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26509 , since in the latter case only the
26512 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26517 will be under the square root sign:
26518 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26524 \begin_layout Standard
26525 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26527 \begin_inset Formula
26529 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26538 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26539 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26542 \begin_layout Subsection
26546 \begin_layout Standard
26547 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26548 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26552 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26553 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26554 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26555 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26556 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26560 \begin_layout Subsection
26561 Exponents and Subscripts
26562 \begin_inset Index idx
26565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_inset Index idx
26575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26584 \begin_layout Standard
26585 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26588 arg "math-superscript"
26594 arg "math-subscript"
26597 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26599 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26602 , type in a formula
26605 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26615 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26621 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26625 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26631 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26637 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26646 , you have to use an extra
26650 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26651 For example, if you want
26652 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26658 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26664 Subscripts are similar: To get
26665 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26671 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26679 \begin_layout Subsection
26681 \begin_inset Index idx
26684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 \begin_layout Standard
26694 Create a fraction either with the command
26700 or by using the icon
26703 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26709 \begin_inset space ~
26715 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26716 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26717 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26722 To move back up, press
26727 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26728 \begin_inset Formula
26730 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26733 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26741 \begin_layout Subsection
26743 \begin_inset Index idx
26746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26755 \begin_layout Standard
26756 Roots can be created using the
26759 \begin_inset space ~
26767 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26773 arg "math-insert \\root"
26795 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26801 always produces a square root.
26804 \begin_layout Subsection
26805 Operators with Limits
26806 \begin_inset Index idx
26809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26816 \begin_inset Index idx
26819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26828 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26835 \begin_layout Standard
26837 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26841 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26844 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26845 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26846 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26847 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26848 The sum operator will automatically place its
26849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26856 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26858 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26862 \begin_inset Formula
26864 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26869 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26873 \begin_layout Standard
26874 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26876 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26877 behind the operator and using the menu
26879 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26880 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26882 \begin_inset space ~
26886 \begin_inset space ~
26900 \begin_layout Standard
26901 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26910 \begin_inset Index idx
26913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26920 \begin_inset Formula
26922 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26927 which will place the
26928 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26940 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26941 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26947 \begin_layout Standard
26948 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26955 Have a look at section
26956 \begin_inset space ~
26960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26962 reference "subsec:Functions"
26966 for an explanation of function macros.
26969 \begin_layout Subsection
26971 \begin_inset Index idx
26974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26983 \begin_layout Standard
26984 Most math symbols can be found in the
26987 \begin_inset space ~
26992 under one of several categories; including
27009 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27013 \begin_layout Standard
27014 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27015 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27016 don't have to use the
27019 \begin_inset space ~
27024 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27026 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27029 \begin_layout Subsection
27031 \begin_inset Index idx
27034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27050 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27056 \begin_inset space ~
27064 arg "math-insert \\space"
27068 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27069 For example, the sequence
27074 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27077 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27079 \begin_inset Graphics
27080 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27085 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27086 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27087 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27088 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27089 , because they are negative
27091 Here are two examples:
27094 \begin_layout Standard
27104 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27110 \begin_layout Standard
27120 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27126 \begin_layout Subsection
27128 \begin_inset Index idx
27131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27140 name "subsec:Functions"
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27151 \begin_inset space ~
27156 contains under the button
27159 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27162 a number of function macros, such as
27163 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27167 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27175 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27182 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27183 avoid confusions, because
27184 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27188 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27194 \begin_layout Standard
27195 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27197 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27201 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27207 \begin_layout Standard
27208 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27209 are placed, as described in section
27210 \begin_inset space ~
27214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27216 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27223 \begin_layout Subsection
27225 \begin_inset Index idx
27228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27237 \begin_layout Standard
27238 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27240 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27241 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27242 commands, for example, to enter
27243 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27246 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27247 Our example is entered by typing
27252 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27259 \begin_inset space ~
27263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27265 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27269 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27272 \begin_layout Standard
27273 \begin_inset Float table
27280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27281 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27286 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27290 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27300 \begin_inset Tabular
27301 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27302 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27303 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27304 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27389 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27443 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27497 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27551 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27605 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27659 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27713 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27767 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27821 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27887 \begin_layout Standard
27888 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27891 \begin_inset space ~
27899 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27902 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27906 \begin_layout Section
27907 Brackets and Delimiters
27908 \begin_inset Index idx
27911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 \begin_inset Index idx
27921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27930 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27937 \begin_layout Standard
27938 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27940 For some purposes, using just the keys
27945 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27946 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27947 toolbar delimiter icon
27950 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27954 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27955 \begin_inset Formula
27957 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27965 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27966 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27970 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27973 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27979 \begin_inset Formula
27981 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27990 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27991 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27995 \begin_layout Standard
27996 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27997 left side and right side.
27998 If you use the option
28001 \begin_inset space ~
28006 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28007 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28009 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28014 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28015 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28019 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28020 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28021 is to go inside the brackets.
28022 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28027 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28028 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28029 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28033 arg "math-delim ( )"
28039 \begin_layout Section
28040 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28041 \begin_inset Index idx
28044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28051 \begin_inset Index idx
28054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28061 \begin_inset Index idx
28064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28065 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28073 \begin_layout Standard
28074 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28078 \begin_inset space ~
28086 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28090 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28091 Here is an example:
28092 \begin_inset Formula
28094 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28103 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28104 \begin_inset space ~
28108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28110 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28115 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28116 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28117 This alignment is set in the box
28122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28171 for every column as default.
28172 For example, the sequence
28173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28184 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28185 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28186 corresponds to the relevant column.
28187 The result will look like this:
28188 \begin_inset Formula
28191 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28192 column & has & has\,right\\
28193 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28202 \begin_layout Standard
28203 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28206 arg "newline-insert newline"
28209 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28210 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28212 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28215 or the math toolbar.
28218 \begin_layout Standard
28219 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28220 It can be created with the menu
28222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28223 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28225 \begin_inset space ~
28237 Here is an example:
28238 \begin_inset Formula
28252 \begin_layout Standard
28253 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28256 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28259 arg "newline-insert newline"
28263 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28268 arg "newline-insert newline"
28271 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28279 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28280 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28281 A new row is created by every further entry of
28284 arg "newline-insert newline"
28288 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28289 Here is an example:
28290 \begin_inset Formula
28292 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28293 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28298 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28299 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28300 \begin_inset Formula
28302 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28310 \begin_layout Standard
28311 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28318 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28319 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28322 reference "eq:asquared"
28327 The other types are described in section
28328 \begin_inset space ~
28332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28334 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28341 \begin_layout Section
28342 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28343 \begin_inset Index idx
28346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28347 Math ! Formula numbering
28353 \begin_inset Index idx
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28357 Math ! Referencing formulas
28363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28365 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28372 \begin_layout Standard
28373 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28376 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28378 \begin_inset space ~
28382 \begin_inset space ~
28390 arg "math-number-toggle"
28394 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28395 within parentheses.
28396 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28397 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28398 the document class.
28399 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28400 separated by a dot:
28401 \begin_inset Formula
28411 arg "math-number-toggle"
28414 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28415 You can only number displayed formulas.
28418 \begin_layout Standard
28419 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28421 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28422 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28424 \begin_inset space ~
28428 \begin_inset space ~
28436 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28439 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28440 \begin_inset Formula
28443 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28449 To number all lines use the shortcut
28452 arg "math-number-toggle"
28458 \begin_layout Standard
28459 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28462 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28463 A label is inserted with the menu
28465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28474 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28475 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28476 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28488 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28489 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28490 We inserted in the following example the label
28491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28498 in the second line:
28499 \begin_inset Formula
28501 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28502 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28507 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28508 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28509 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28513 \begin_inset space ~
28521 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28525 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28526 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28527 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28528 as the formula number:
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28532 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28535 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28542 \begin_layout Standard
28543 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28544 's cross-reference box are described in section
28545 \begin_inset space ~
28549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28551 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28556 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28564 \begin_layout Section
28565 User defined math macros
28566 \begin_inset Index idx
28569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28578 \begin_layout Standard
28580 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28581 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28582 Math macros are explained in section
28585 \begin_inset space ~
28597 \begin_layout Section
28601 \begin_layout Subsection
28603 \begin_inset Index idx
28606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28616 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28617 To set a font in a formula, use the
28620 \begin_inset space ~
28628 arg "math-insert \\font"
28631 , or enter its command, listed in table
28632 \begin_inset space ~
28636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28638 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28646 \begin_inset Float table
28653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28654 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28659 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28663 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28673 \begin_inset Tabular
28674 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28675 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28676 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28677 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28709 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28763 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28796 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28823 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28845 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28851 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28852 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28881 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28915 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28937 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28943 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28951 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28964 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28980 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29014 \begin_layout Standard
29015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29023 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29026 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29028 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29032 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29051 \begin_layout Standard
29052 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29053 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29058 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29059 space when you need a space in the box.
29060 Here is an example where
29061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29072 denotes the set of numbers:
29073 \begin_inset Formula
29075 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29083 \begin_layout Standard
29084 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29085 You can, for example, put a character in
29094 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29098 \begin_inset Newline newline
29101 So it is better not to use this feature.
29104 \begin_layout Standard
29105 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29106 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29110 \begin_inset Newline newline
29113 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29119 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29120 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29133 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29136 \begin_layout Standard
29137 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29139 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29140 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29142 \begin_inset space ~
29150 \begin_layout Subsection
29152 \begin_inset Index idx
29155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29164 \begin_layout Standard
29165 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29167 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29171 \begin_inset space ~
29175 \begin_inset space ~
29183 \begin_inset space ~
29191 arg "math-insert \\font"
29195 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29196 in black instead of blue.
29197 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29198 Here is an example:
29199 \begin_inset Formula
29202 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29203 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29212 \begin_layout Subsection
29214 \begin_inset Index idx
29217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29226 \begin_layout Standard
29227 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29228 automatically chosen in most situations.
29246 For most characters,
29254 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29255 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29260 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29261 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29262 thinks are appropriate.
29263 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29266 arg "math-insert \\style"
29270 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29271 For example, you can set
29272 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29275 , which is normally in
29284 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29288 The four styles are used in the following example:
29291 \begin_layout Standard
29292 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29296 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29300 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29304 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29310 \begin_layout Standard
29311 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29312 is set in a particular size with the menu
29314 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29316 \begin_inset space ~
29321 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29322 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29323 will be adjusted to correspond.
29324 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 \begin_layout Standard
29339 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29345 \begin_layout Section
29346 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29348 \begin_inset Index idx
29351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29358 \begin_inset Index idx
29361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29372 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29373 that are in common use.
29376 \begin_layout Subsection
29377 Enabling AMS-Support
29380 \begin_layout Standard
29381 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29383 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29399 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29400 selecting the checkbox
29403 \begin_inset space ~
29407 \begin_inset space ~
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29424 \begin_inset Index idx
29427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29428 Document ! Settings
29436 \begin_inset space ~
29442 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29443 -errors in formulas,
29444 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29447 \begin_layout Subsection
29449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29451 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29456 \begin_inset Index idx
29459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29460 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29468 \begin_layout Standard
29469 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29470 provides a selection of different formula types.
29472 allows you to choose between
29493 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29494 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29501 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29504 \begin_layout Chapter
29508 \begin_layout Section
29510 \begin_inset Index idx
29513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29522 name "sec:Cross-References"
29529 \begin_layout Standard
29530 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29531 's strengths is cross-references.
29532 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29534 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29535 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29536 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29539 \begin_layout Enumerate
29543 \begin_layout Enumerate
29544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29546 name "enu:Second-item"
29553 \begin_layout Enumerate
29557 \begin_layout Standard
29558 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29563 or by pressing the toolbar button
29570 A gray label box like this:
29571 \begin_inset Graphics
29572 filename clipart/label.png
29576 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29578 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29613 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29614 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29630 \begin_layout Standard
29631 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29636 or the toolbar button
29639 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29643 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29644 \begin_inset Graphics
29645 filename clipart/reference.png
29649 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29651 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29664 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29668 \begin_layout Standard
29669 As an alternative to
29671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29674 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29679 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29680 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29682 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29694 \begin_layout Standard
29695 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29696 \begin_inset space ~
29700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29702 reference "enu:Second-item"
29709 \begin_layout Standard
29710 It is recommended to use a protected space
29714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29715 described in section
29716 \begin_inset space ~
29720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29722 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29731 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29732 line breaks between them.
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29739 \begin_layout Description
29740 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29743 reference "fig:Two-images"
29750 \begin_layout Description
29751 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29752 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29764 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29771 \begin_layout Description
29772 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29773 \begin_inset space ~
29777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29778 LatexCommand pageref
29779 reference "fig:Two-images"
29786 \begin_layout Description
29788 \begin_inset space ~
29792 \begin_inset space ~
29795 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29797 LatexCommand vpageref
29798 reference "fig:Two-images"
29803 \begin_inset Newline newline
29806 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29807 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29808 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29809 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29810 it prints “on the next page”.
29811 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29814 \begin_layout Description
29816 \begin_inset space ~
29820 \begin_inset space ~
29824 \begin_inset space ~
29827 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29830 reference "fig:Two-images"
29835 \begin_inset Newline newline
29838 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29844 ; otherwise it behaves like
29848 \begin_inset space ~
29852 \begin_inset space ~
29861 \begin_layout Description
29863 \begin_inset space ~
29866 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29867 \begin_inset Newline newline
29871 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29879 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29889 \begin_inset Index idx
29892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29894 packages ! prettyref
29900 \begin_inset Index idx
29903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29905 packages ! refstyle
29916 \begin_inset Newline newline
29919 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29920 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29923 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29928 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29936 is the default and preferred because
29940 supports only English documents.
29941 The format is specified by using the command
29945 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29954 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29955 preamble of the document.
29956 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29974 \begin_inset Newline newline
29981 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29986 \begin_inset Newline newline
29997 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29998 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30000 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30001 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30006 , you might do so as follows:
30007 \begin_inset Newline newline
30014 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30015 format{prop}{Proposition
30020 \begin_inset Newline newline
30023 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30024 the package documentation
30025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30027 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30033 \begin_inset Newline newline
30044 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30051 \begin_layout Description
30053 \begin_inset space ~
30056 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30058 LatexCommand nameref
30059 reference "fig:Two-images"
30066 \begin_layout Description
30068 \begin_inset space ~
30071 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30072 label for the reference:
30073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30074 LatexCommand labelonly
30075 reference "fig:Two-images"
30080 \begin_inset Newline newline
30083 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30084 Code, if you want to issue a command
30085 that \SpecialChar LyX
30091 , then you may want to use the
30094 \begin_inset space ~
30099 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30109 This is the form needed for e.
30110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30114 \begin_inset space \space{}
30121 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30122 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30124 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30128 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30132 \begin_layout Standard
30133 You can only use the style
30137 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30141 is always possible.
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30146 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30148 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30149 \begin_inset space ~
30153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30155 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30163 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30167 \begin_inset space ~
30171 \begin_inset space ~
30176 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30177 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30178 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30181 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30184 \begin_inset space ~
30189 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30190 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30193 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30197 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30198 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30199 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30205 \begin_layout Standard
30206 You can change labels at any time.
30207 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30209 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30211 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30212 change them all manually
30217 \begin_layout Standard
30218 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30220 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30224 \begin_layout Standard
30225 References are described in detail in the section
30236 \begin_layout Section
30237 Table of Contents and other Listings
30238 \begin_inset Index idx
30241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30248 \begin_inset Index idx
30251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 Navigating ! Outline
30258 \begin_inset Index idx
30261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30277 \begin_layout Subsection
30279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30281 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30288 \begin_layout Standard
30289 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30292 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30294 \begin_inset space ~
30298 \begin_inset space ~
30304 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30306 If you click on it, the
30310 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30311 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30312 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30314 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30316 \begin_inset space ~
30321 that is described in section
30322 \begin_inset space ~
30326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30328 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30335 \begin_layout Standard
30336 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30337 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30339 \begin_inset space ~
30343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30345 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30349 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30351 \begin_inset space ~
30355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30357 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30361 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30363 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30366 \begin_layout Subsection
30367 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30370 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30377 \begin_layout Standard
30378 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30380 You can insert them via the
30382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30383 List/Contents/References
30386 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30389 \begin_layout Section
30390 URLs and Hyperlinks
30391 \begin_inset Index idx
30394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 \begin_inset Index idx
30404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30413 \begin_layout Subsection
30415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30433 \begin_layout Standard
30434 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30436 \begin_inset Flex URL
30439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30441 https://www.lyx.org
30449 \begin_layout Standard
30450 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30456 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30460 \begin_layout Standard
30461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30469 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30478 \begin_layout Subsection
30480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30482 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30489 \begin_layout Standard
30490 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30495 or with the toolbar button
30502 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30511 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30512 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30515 name "LyX's homepage"
30516 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30521 , an Email address like this:
30522 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30524 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30525 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30531 , or a link to a file.
30536 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30544 \begin_layout Standard
30545 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30558 to the link target.
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30563 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30564 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30565 the text style dialog.
30566 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30572 name "LyX's homepage"
30573 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30581 \begin_layout Standard
30582 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30586 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30593 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30595 \begin_inset Newline newline
30603 \begin_inset Newline newline
30610 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30611 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30615 \begin_layout Section
30617 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30619 \begin_inset Index idx
30622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30631 name "sec:Counters"
30638 \begin_layout Standard
30640 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
30641 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30642 is its ability to manage counters.
30643 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30644 modify counters directly.
30645 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30647 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
30651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30653 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
30654 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
30655 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
30656 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
30657 to set the section counter to four.
30664 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
30665 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30666 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30667 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30670 \begin_layout Standard
30672 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30673 There are five commands you can use:
30676 \begin_layout Enumerate
30678 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30679 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30682 \begin_layout Enumerate
30684 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30685 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30686 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30689 \begin_layout Enumerate
30691 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30692 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30695 \begin_layout Enumerate
30697 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30698 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30702 \begin_layout Enumerate
30704 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30705 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30710 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30711 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30712 those that are available in the current document class.
30717 \begin_layout Section
30719 \begin_inset Index idx
30722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30731 name "sec:Appendices"
30738 \begin_layout Standard
30739 Appendices are created with the menu
30741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30743 \begin_inset space ~
30747 \begin_inset space ~
30753 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30754 as the appendix part of the book.
30755 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30758 \begin_layout Standard
30759 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30760 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30761 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30762 and the subsection number.
30763 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30767 \begin_layout Standard
30769 \begin_inset space ~
30773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30775 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30783 \begin_inset space ~
30787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30789 reference "subsec:Export"
30796 \begin_layout Section
30798 \begin_inset Index idx
30801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30810 name "sec:Bibliography"
30817 \begin_layout Standard
30818 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30820 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30821 \begin_inset space ~
30825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30827 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30834 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30839 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30840 \begin_inset space ~
30844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30846 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30851 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30852 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30853 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30857 using a bibliography database.
30860 \begin_layout Standard
30861 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30862 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30866 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30867 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30868 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30869 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30870 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30873 \begin_layout Subsection
30874 The Bibliography Environment
30875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30877 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30884 \begin_layout Standard
30889 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30891 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30900 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30902 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30903 of ASCII characters only.
30907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30909 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30912 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30918 \begin_inset Newline newline
30922 \begin_inset Flex URL
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30927 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30937 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30947 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30948 \begin_inset Newline newline
30955 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30956 the number of the entry.
30961 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30970 \begin_layout Standard
30971 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30976 or the toolbar button
30979 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30983 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30984 containing the available citations.
30985 Select one or more keys from the list and
30995 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30996 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31000 \begin_layout Standard
31001 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31002 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31003 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31015 \begin_layout Standard
31019 Companion Second Edition
31022 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31024 key "latexcompanion"
31032 \begin_layout Standard
31033 The \SpecialChar LyX
31034 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31045 \begin_layout Standard
31046 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31053 \begin_inset Index idx
31056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31065 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31066 the label needs to be given the form
31067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31078 Author A and Author B(Year)
31079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31086 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31098 in the document settings
31099 \begin_inset Index idx
31102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31103 Document ! Settings
31110 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31112 \begin_inset space ~
31118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31120 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31128 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31130 Once you have done that, the
31134 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31151 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31152 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31153 These two are madatory.
31154 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31157 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31159 ) and in abrreviated form (
31166 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31167 add the abbreviated form to
31171 and the full list to the optional
31179 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31180 If specified like this,
31182 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31183 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31193 is specified, toggling
31194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31201 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31202 full and abbreviated list
31206 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31207 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31208 the citation references.
31209 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31214 \begin_layout Standard
31215 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31220 \begin_inset space ~
31228 arg "layout-paragraph"
31232 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31235 \begin_layout Subsection
31236 Bibliography databases
31237 \begin_inset Index idx
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31241 Bibliography ! Databases
31247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31249 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31256 \begin_layout Standard
31257 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31263 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31265 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31266 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31271 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31273 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31274 your working field in a database.
31275 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31276 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31277 list for that document.
31278 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31282 \begin_layout Standard
31283 The database is a text file with the file extension
31284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31295 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31296 The format is explained in
31297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31304 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31306 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31308 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31314 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31315 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31316 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31318 \begin_inset Flex URL
31321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31323 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31331 \begin_layout Standard
31333 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31334 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31335 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31337 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31339 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31340 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31341 Those are addressed by
31346 \begin_inset Index idx
31349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31351 packages ! biblatex
31357 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31358 (although it has been significantly
31359 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31369 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31370 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31371 might conversely fail to correctly
31372 handle databases that use specific
31381 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31386 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31391 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31397 \begin_inset Index idx
31400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31401 Document ! Settings
31413 \begin_inset space ~
31418 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31427 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31429 \begin_inset Index idx
31432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31433 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31442 \begin_layout Standard
31443 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31447 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31449 \begin_inset space ~
31455 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31456 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31464 Add bibliography to TOC
31466 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31471 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31472 in the document or just the cited references.
31474 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31479 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31480 differ from the encoding of the document.
31485 \begin_layout Standard
31486 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31487 style file is a text file with the file extension
31488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31499 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31500 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31501 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31502 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31504 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31510 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31511 \begin_inset Newline newline
31515 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31517 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31527 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31532 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31536 \begin_layout Standard
31537 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31542 \begin_inset Index idx
31545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31546 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31552 \begin_inset Index idx
31555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31557 packages ! biblatex
31565 \begin_layout Standard
31566 Accessing a database via
31570 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31574 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31576 \begin_inset space ~
31582 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31583 you cannot select a
31588 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31592 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31595 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31596 As for the styles, note the following.
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31606 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31619 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31620 file (text file with the file extension
31621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31632 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31633 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31635 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31639 \begin_layout Standard
31644 styles are not set in the
31647 \begin_inset space ~
31652 dialog, but in the document settings.
31653 \begin_inset Index idx
31656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31657 Document ! Settings
31662 However, in the dialog in the
31666 field, which is only visible if you use
31670 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31671 example how its heading will appear).
31672 These options are described in detail in the
31677 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31687 \begin_layout Standard
31688 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31689 \begin_inset space ~
31693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31695 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31706 Bibliography Processors
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31711 uses a bibliography processor,
31712 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31713 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31714 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31716 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31717 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31720 \begin_layout Standard
31721 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31723 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31724 You can do this on a general level in
31726 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31727 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31728 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31731 or for individual documents in
31733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31734 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31738 The following variants are available by default:
31741 \begin_layout Description
31742 biber a specific, modern processor
31743 \begin_inset Index idx
31746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31753 developed exclusively for
31757 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31763 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31768 makes use of; if you use the
31772 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31779 \begin_layout Description
31780 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31781 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31782 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31786 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31789 \begin_layout Description
31790 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31791 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31795 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31799 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31803 features are supported.
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31807 By default (with the
31813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31814 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31827 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31828 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31829 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31832 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31833 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31846 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31847 -based bibliography styles).
31848 This should suit most needs.
31851 \begin_layout Standard
31852 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31853 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31854 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31859 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31860 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31861 You can adjust it in
31863 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31864 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31865 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31871 \begin_layout Standard
31872 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31873 can add below the selection.
31874 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31875 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31881 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31895 \begin_layout Standard
31897 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31899 These are explained in detail in section
31901 Customizing Bibliographies
31905 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31910 Additional Features
31913 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31917 \begin_layout Subsection
31919 \begin_inset Index idx
31922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31923 Bibliography ! Citation format
31929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31931 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31938 \begin_layout Standard
31939 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31944 \begin_inset space \space{}
31947 numerical citation (as
31948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31955 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31963 ) or author-year citations (as
31964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31973 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31977 \begin_layout Standard
31978 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31982 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31986 \begin_inset Index idx
31989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31990 Document ! Settings
31995 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32001 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32002 labels, is there to use
32005 \begin_inset space ~
32016 \begin_inset space ~
32021 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32024 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32031 \begin_layout Standard
32032 With a bibliography database (see
32033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32035 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32042 ) one has in contrary to the
32046 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32047 These style formats are available:
32050 \begin_layout Description
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32055 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32056 -based approached without any additional packages
32057 (simple numeric citations).
32060 \begin_layout Description
32061 Biblatex loads the package
32066 \begin_inset Index idx
32069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32071 packages ! biblatex
32076 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32078 Biblatex citation style
32082 Biblatex bibliography style
32085 Options to the package
32089 can be entered in the
32096 \begin_layout Description
32098 \begin_inset space ~
32102 \begin_inset space ~
32105 mode) loads the package
32109 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32110 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32122 behavior very closely.
32127 this option has some additional styles.
32132 styles are also supported by this variant.
32135 \begin_layout Description
32137 \begin_inset space ~
32140 (BibTeX) loads the package
32145 \begin_inset Index idx
32148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32155 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32158 \begin_layout Description
32160 \begin_inset space ~
32163 (BibTeX) loads the package
32168 \begin_inset Index idx
32171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32178 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32190 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32192 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32201 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32203 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32204 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32206 Biblatex citation style
32209 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32215 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32219 \begin_layout Standard
32220 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32221 are available in the
32226 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32227 a name prefix such as
32228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32243 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32248 \begin_inset space \space{}
32252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32264 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32270 \begin_inset space \space{}
32273 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32279 \begin_inset space \space{}
32283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32295 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32299 \begin_inset space ~
32307 \begin_inset space ~
32313 Here is a simple example where the text
32314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32318 \begin_inset space ~
32322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32325 appears after the reference:
32328 \begin_layout Quote
32330 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32333 key "latexcompanion"
32341 \begin_layout Standard
32342 All styles except for
32346 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32356 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32360 \begin_layout Standard
32361 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32362 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32363 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32368 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32369 multi-citation (so-called
32370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32373 qualified citation lists
32374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32380 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32385 dialog will display three columns in the field
32392 \begin_inset space ~
32400 \begin_inset space ~
32408 \begin_inset space ~
32414 If you double-click on an item's
32417 \begin_inset space ~
32425 \begin_inset space ~
32430 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32433 General text before
32439 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32442 \begin_layout Subsection
32444 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32447 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32451 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32455 \begin_layout Standard
32457 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32459 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32462 \begin_inset space ~
32466 \begin_inset space ~
32470 \begin_inset space ~
32474 \begin_inset space ~
32477 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32480 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32483 \begin_layout Itemize
32485 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32486 If citation entries include any of the fields
32487 \begin_inset Flex Code
32490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32492 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32501 \begin_inset Flex Code
32504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32506 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32514 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32515 \begin_inset Flex Code
32518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32520 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32528 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32529 \begin_inset Flex Code
32532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32534 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32542 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32545 \begin_layout Itemize
32547 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32548 If citation entries include any of the fields
32549 \begin_inset Flex Code
32552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32554 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32562 (filled by JabRef) or
32563 \begin_inset Flex Code
32566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32568 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32576 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32577 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32578 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32581 \begin_layout Standard
32583 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32584 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32585 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32588 Search drive for cited files
32592 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32593 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32594 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32599 It uses the tokens supplied at
32603 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32604 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32605 arbitrary position).
32607 opens the first matching file it finds.
32608 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32609 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32610 the chance this works for you.
32615 \begin_layout Standard
32617 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32618 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32619 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32621 \begin_inset Flex Code
32624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32626 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32635 \begin_inset Flex Code
32638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32640 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32648 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32652 Cite format description
32659 \begin_layout Section
32661 \begin_inset Index idx
32664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32680 \begin_layout Standard
32681 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32685 \begin_inset space ~
32690 or the toolbar button
32697 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32698 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32699 by \SpecialChar LyX
32700 as the index entry.
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32704 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32707 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32709 \begin_inset space ~
32715 A light blue box labeled
32716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32727 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32728 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32734 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32735 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32736 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32738 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32740 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32748 \begin_layout Subsection
32749 Grouping Index Entries
32750 \begin_inset Index idx
32753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32762 \begin_layout Standard
32763 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32765 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32766 lists under the entry
32767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32775 First we create the entry
32776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32784 \begin_inset space ~
32788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32790 reference "subsec:Lists"
32795 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32796 \begin_inset space ~
32800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32802 reference "sec:Itemize"
32806 , we insert the command
32809 \begin_layout Standard
32815 \begin_layout Standard
32819 \begin_layout Standard
32825 \begin_layout Standard
32826 for the enumerated list in section
32827 \begin_inset space ~
32831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32833 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32840 \begin_layout Standard
32841 The exclamation mark
32842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32849 marks the grouping levels.
32850 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32851 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32852 If we don't have an index entry for
32853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32860 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32863 \begin_layout Subsection
32865 \begin_inset Index idx
32868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32869 Index ! Page ranges
32877 \begin_layout Standard
32878 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32880 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32881 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32882 an index entry in section
32883 \begin_inset space ~
32887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32889 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32896 \begin_layout Standard
32899 Paragraph environments|(
32902 \begin_layout Standard
32903 and another entry at the end of section
32904 \begin_inset space ~
32908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32910 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32917 \begin_layout Standard
32920 Paragraph environments|)
32923 \begin_layout Standard
32925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32948 respectively start and end the index range.
32949 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32950 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32951 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32952 An example is the index entry
32953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32956 Document ! Settings
32957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32963 \begin_layout Subsection
32965 \begin_inset Index idx
32968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32969 Index ! Cross referencing
32977 \begin_layout Standard
32978 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32979 We referred for example in the index entry
32980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32988 \begin_inset space ~
32992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32994 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32998 ) to the index entry
32999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33006 in the same section using the entry
33009 \begin_layout Standard
33012 GIF|see{Image formats}
33015 \begin_layout Standard
33016 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33018 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33019 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33022 \begin_layout Subsection
33024 \begin_inset Index idx
33027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33028 Index ! Entry order
33036 \begin_layout Standard
33037 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33038 follow the rules for the index order.
33039 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33045 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33047 \begin_inset space ~
33051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33053 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33062 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33063 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33088 \begin_inset Index idx
33091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33092 Dummy entries ! maïs
33098 \begin_inset Index idx
33101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33102 Dummy entries ! maître
33108 \begin_inset Index idx
33111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33112 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33117 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33118 maïs, maison, maître.
33119 To achieve this, we use the command
33122 \begin_layout Standard
33125 previous entry@current entry
33128 \begin_layout Standard
33129 In our case we want to have
33130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33145 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33154 \begin_layout Standard
33155 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33156 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33158 See the next subsection for an example.
33161 \begin_layout Subsection
33163 \begin_inset Index idx
33166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33167 Index ! Entry layout
33175 \begin_layout Standard
33176 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33177 \begin_inset Index idx
33180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33183 This is an italic dummy entry
33188 You can also format the page number using the character
33189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33196 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33197 -command without a backslash.
33198 We can write for example
33201 \begin_layout Standard
33204 italic page number:|textit
33207 \begin_layout Standard
33208 to get the page number in italic.
33209 \begin_inset Index idx
33212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33213 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33218 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33219 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33237 \begin_inset space ~
33243 Have a look at section
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33250 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33254 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33267 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33271 to generate the index, see section
33272 \begin_inset space ~
33276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33278 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33287 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33292 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33293 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33296 key "latexcompanion"
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33310 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33312 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33313 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33314 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33315 If so, put the following in the preamble
33318 \begin_layout Standard
33330 \begin_layout Standard
33334 \begin_layout Standard
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 in the index entry.
33342 \begin_inset Index idx
33345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33346 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33351 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33352 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33353 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33356 \begin_layout Standard
33357 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33358 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33359 a bold font for all index entries.
33360 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33372 documentation for details,
33373 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33375 key "makeindex,xindy"
33383 \begin_layout Subsection
33385 \begin_inset Index idx
33388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33397 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33404 \begin_layout Standard
33405 If the index generation program
33409 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33410 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33414 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33415 distribution, is used.
33419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33424 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33425 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33426 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33427 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33428 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33438 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33440 dialog, see section
33441 \begin_inset space ~
33445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33447 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33452 The available options are listed and explained in
33453 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33455 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33461 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33465 \begin_layout Standard
33466 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33467 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33471 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33475 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33476 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33479 \begin_layout Subsection
33483 \begin_layout Standard
33484 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33485 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33493 next to the standard index.
33495 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33496 that add this feature.
33503 \begin_inset Index idx
33506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33508 packages ! splitidx
33513 package to generate multiple indexes.
33514 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33520 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33530 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33531 style, but it also includes
33532 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33533 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33543 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33546 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33549 and select the option
33551 Use multiple Indexes
33558 already contains the standard index
33559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33567 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33568 also appear as a heading) to the
33572 input field and press the
33577 The new index now also appears in the list.
33578 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33579 label color to the new index.
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33583 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33587 List/Contents/References
33593 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33594 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33595 are additional features:
33598 \begin_layout Itemize
33599 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33600 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33603 \begin_layout Itemize
33604 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33605 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33610 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33611 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33612 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33613 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33616 \begin_layout Itemize
33621 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33622 code in the name of the index.
33625 \begin_layout Section
33626 Nomenclature/Glossary
33627 \begin_inset Index idx
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33637 \begin_inset Index idx
33640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33671 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33680 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33681 called nomenclature or glossary.
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33685 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33692 \begin_inset Index idx
33695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33703 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33712 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33716 \begin_layout Standard
33717 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33718 and then use the menu
33720 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33726 \begin_inset space ~
33731 or the toolbar button
33734 arg "nomencl-insert"
33739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33750 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33753 \begin_layout Standard
33754 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33755 The first is the term or
33759 that you wish to define.
33764 of the term or symbol.
33767 \begin_layout Standard
33768 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33776 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33777 code for nomenclature entries the option
33781 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33789 \begin_layout Subsection
33790 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33791 \begin_inset Index idx
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33795 Nomenclature ! Layout
33803 \begin_layout Standard
33804 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33808 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33815 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33823 \begin_inset Newline newline
33831 \begin_inset Newline newline
33837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33844 character starts/ends the formula.
33845 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33846 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33858 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33868 \begin_layout Standard
33869 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33870 syntax is given in section
33871 \begin_inset space ~
33875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33877 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33884 \begin_layout Standard
33888 \begin_inset space ~
33893 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33895 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33900 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33907 in this document is:
33908 \begin_inset Newline newline
33913 dummy entry for the character
33918 \begin_inset Newline newline
33930 \begin_inset space ~
33940 font use the command
33969 \begin_layout Standard
33970 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33975 \begin_inset space \space{}
33979 \begin_inset Newline newline
33995 \begin_inset Newline newline
33998 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33999 This command will make the font of all symbols
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34014 \begin_layout Standard
34015 If the characters |
34016 \begin_inset space \space{}
34020 \begin_inset space \space{}
34024 \begin_inset space \space{}
34028 \begin_inset space \space{}
34032 \begin_inset space \space{}
34035 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34036 code they need to be escaped
34038 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34040 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34043 character in front of them.
34044 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34046 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34047 LatexCommand nomenclature
34048 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34049 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34055 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34057 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34058 LatexCommand nomenclature
34059 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34060 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34070 \begin_layout Subsection
34071 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34072 \begin_inset Index idx
34075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34076 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34084 \begin_layout Standard
34085 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34086 -code of the symbol
34088 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34090 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34093 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34094 LatexCommand nomenclature
34096 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34104 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34108 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34109 LatexCommand nomenclature
34112 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34118 They will be sorted by
34119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34145 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34148 will be sorted before the
34152 since the character
34153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34160 is considered in sorting.
34163 \begin_layout Standard
34164 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34167 \begin_inset space ~
34172 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34173 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34175 For the example given, you can insert
34179 in this field for the
34180 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34187 will be located before
34188 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34200 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34210 \begin_layout Subsection
34211 Nomenclature Options
34212 \begin_inset Index idx
34215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34216 Nomenclature ! Options
34222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34224 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34231 \begin_layout Standard
34236 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34237 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34240 \begin_layout Description
34241 refeq Appends the phrase
34242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34257 to every nomenclature entry, where
34263 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34266 \begin_layout Description
34267 refpage Appends the phrase
34268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34283 to every nomenclature entry, where
34289 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34292 \begin_layout Description
34293 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34298 class options list in the
34300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34304 In this document the options
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34312 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34318 \begin_layout Standard
34319 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34320 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34325 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34328 \begin_layout Description
34338 \begin_layout Description
34341 nomrefpage Like the
34348 \begin_layout Description
34351 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34360 \begin_layout Description
34364 \begin_inset space ~
34370 \begin_inset space ~
34375 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34387 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34388 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34392 \begin_layout Standard
34401 \begin_inset Newline newline
34407 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34411 \begin_inset space ~
34423 unskip, see equation
34426 \begin_inset Newline newline
34433 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34434 \begin_inset Newline newline
34440 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34444 \begin_inset space ~
34461 \begin_layout Standard
34462 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34465 \begin_inset space ~
34470 in the document settings under
34473 \begin_inset space ~
34481 \begin_layout Standard
34489 \begin_inset Newline newline
34493 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 \begin_inset space ~
34509 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34511 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34512 \begin_inset Newline newline
34519 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34520 \begin_inset Newline newline
34524 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34528 \begin_inset space ~
34540 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34545 \begin_layout Subsection
34546 Printing the Nomenclature
34547 \begin_inset Index idx
34550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34551 Nomenclature ! Printing
34559 \begin_layout Standard
34560 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34563 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34579 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34580 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34581 You can choose between these settings:
34584 \begin_layout Description
34585 Default a space of 1
34586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34592 \begin_layout Description
34594 \begin_inset space ~
34598 \begin_inset space ~
34601 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34604 \begin_layout Description
34605 Custom custom space
34608 \begin_layout Standard
34609 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34618 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34626 For example, in order to change the name to
34630 , add the following line to the preamble:
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34646 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34649 \begin_layout Standard
34650 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34651 \begin_inset Newline newline
34666 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34669 \begin_layout Subsection
34670 Nomenclature Program
34671 \begin_inset Index idx
34674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34675 Nomenclature ! Program
34681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34683 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34690 \begin_layout Standard
34696 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34697 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34699 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34704 by adding options, see section
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34711 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34716 The available options are listed and explained in
34717 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34719 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34727 \begin_layout Section
34729 \begin_inset Index idx
34732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34739 \begin_inset Index idx
34742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34743 Document ! Branches
34749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34751 name "sec:Branches"
34758 \begin_layout Standard
34759 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34760 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34761 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34762 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34765 \begin_layout Standard
34766 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34767 allows you to put text into branches.
34768 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34769 To create a branch, either select the menu
34771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34772 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34775 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34784 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34785 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34786 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34787 and whether the name of the branch should
34788 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34789 (see below for an example).
34790 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34791 to the name of the other) and to add
34792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34807 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34808 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34811 \begin_layout Standard
34812 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34813 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34818 where you can choose a branch.
34819 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34823 \begin_layout Standard
34824 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34825 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34828 \begin_layout Standard
34829 \begin_inset Branch Question
34833 \begin_layout Standard
34838 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34851 \begin_layout Standard
34856 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34864 \begin_layout Standard
34871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34872 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34875 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34876 Consider for example a file
34877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34884 which has the above branches.
34886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34893 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34917 branch were inactive,
34918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34933 branch was active, likewise
34934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34949 branch was active, and
34950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34953 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34957 if both branches were active.
34958 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34959 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34965 \begin_layout Standard
34966 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34972 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34973 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34977 \begin_inset space ~
34985 \begin_layout Standard
34986 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34990 \begin_layout Standard
34996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35003 branch is deactivated.
35009 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35015 \begin_layout Standard
35016 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35017 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35018 definitions for each branch.
35019 For example you can define for the question branch
35023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35024 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35025 -syntax, see section
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35032 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35044 \begin_layout Standard
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35064 \begin_layout Standard
35065 and for the answer branch
35068 \begin_layout Standard
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35088 \begin_layout Standard
35089 \begin_inset Branch Question
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35125 \begin_layout Standard
35126 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35130 \begin_layout Standard
35134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35162 \begin_layout Standard
35163 Now it is possible to use the
35167 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35174 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35177 commands to obtain conditional output.
35178 Here is an example formula where only the
35185 \begin_inset Formula
35187 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35195 \begin_layout Standard
35196 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35204 \begin_layout Standard
35205 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35211 \begin_inset space \space{}
35214 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35216 For this advanced usage, see the
35222 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35227 \begin_layout Section
35229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35231 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35236 \begin_inset Index idx
35239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35248 \begin_layout Standard
35251 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35252 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35255 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35257 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35263 \begin_inset Index idx
35266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35268 packages ! hyperref
35273 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35274 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35275 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35276 part of the document.
35279 \begin_layout Standard
35280 The header information in the dialog tab
35284 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35285 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35286 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35287 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35291 \begin_inset space ~
35295 \begin_inset space ~
35300 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35301 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35302 and author entries.
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35310 \begin_inset space ~
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35319 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35322 \begin_layout Standard
35323 You can specify in the dialog tab
35327 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35332 \begin_inset space ~
35336 \begin_inset space ~
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35345 option allows long links to be split;
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35352 \begin_inset space ~
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35364 \begin_inset space ~
35369 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35372 \begin_inset space ~
35377 colors the different links.
35378 The default colors are:
35381 \begin_layout Labeling
35382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35387 for hyperlinks and URLs
35390 \begin_layout Labeling
35391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35399 \begin_layout Labeling
35400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35409 but you can change these in the field
35414 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35417 \begin_layout Standard
35420 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35423 \begin_layout Standard
35428 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35429 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35430 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35433 \begin_layout Standard
35438 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35439 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35440 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35450 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35451 when opening the PDF.
35453 \begin_inset space ~
35456 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35457 \begin_inset space ~
35460 1 will only display the sections.
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35465 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35471 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35482 \begin_layout Section
35484 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35488 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35495 \begin_layout Subsection
35498 \begin_inset Index idx
35501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35511 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35519 As \SpecialChar LyX
35520 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35521 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35522 commands and constructs,
35525 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35526 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35527 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35528 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35529 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35530 cannot support all packages and
35534 \begin_layout Standard
35535 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35536 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35537 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35541 Code box is created by the menu
35543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35550 or by the toolbar button
35563 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35574 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35576 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35581 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35586 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35593 , you can write the command part
35599 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35600 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35604 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35605 Code box behind the word.
35606 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35607 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35611 \begin_layout Standard
35612 \begin_inset Graphics
35613 filename clipart/ERT.png
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35625 \begin_layout Standard
35626 This is a line with a
35630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35653 \begin_layout Standard
35654 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35662 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35663 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35664 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35665 know that the command is finished.
35673 \begin_layout Subsection
35674 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35676 \begin_inset Argument 1
35679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35680 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35687 \begin_inset Index idx
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35700 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35707 \begin_layout Standard
35708 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35709 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35710 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35711 uses in the background.
35712 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35713 is based on commands, you can
35714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35722 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35723 any time if you know the right commands.
35724 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35725 is the end of the day.
35726 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35727 all caption labels bold.
35728 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35730 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35734 \begin_layout Standard
35735 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35737 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35739 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35742 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35752 \begin_layout Standard
35753 As result you find that the package
35758 \begin_inset Index idx
35761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35769 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35774 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35786 \begin_layout Standard
35791 usepackage[options]{package name}
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35795 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35796 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35797 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35798 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35801 \begin_layout Standard
35802 In your case the package name is
35807 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35812 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35813 So you add the command
35816 \begin_layout Standard
35821 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35824 \begin_layout Standard
35825 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35830 For more commands provided by the
35834 package, have a look at its documentation,
35835 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35850 \begin_layout Standard
35851 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35853 For example if you use a
35857 class, you don't need the package
35861 , you can instead write
35864 \begin_layout Standard
35869 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35874 \begin_layout Standard
35875 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35876 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35877 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35884 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35887 \begin_layout Standard
35888 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35889 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35891 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35892 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35893 Code box as described in the previous
35897 \begin_layout Standard
35898 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35899 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35904 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35912 \begin_layout Standard
35913 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35919 \begin_layout Standard
35923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35933 \begin_inset Note Note
35936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35937 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35945 \begin_layout Left Header
35946 \begin_inset Argument 1
35949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35969 \begin_inset Note Note
35972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35973 defines the header line as described below
35981 \begin_layout Center Header
35982 \begin_inset Argument 1
35985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35994 \begin_layout Right Header
35995 \begin_inset Argument 1
35998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36019 \begin_layout Left Footer
36020 \begin_inset Argument 1
36023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 \begin_layout Center Footer
36045 \begin_inset Argument 1
36048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36060 \begin_inset Newline newline
36064 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36070 \begin_layout Right Footer
36071 \begin_inset Argument 1
36074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36096 \begin_layout Section
36097 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36100 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36105 \begin_inset Index idx
36108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36109 Document ! Header/Footer line
36115 \begin_inset Index idx
36118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36127 \begin_layout Standard
36128 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36149 \begin_inset space ~
36155 As a second step add in the menu
36157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36158 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36167 Custom Header/Footerlines
36170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36174 This module offers the following 6
36175 \begin_inset space ~
36181 \begin_layout Description
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36187 \begin_inset space ~
36191 \begin_inset space ~
36195 \begin_inset space ~
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36205 \begin_layout Description
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36215 \begin_inset space ~
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36229 \begin_layout Standard
36230 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36231 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36234 \begin_layout Standard
36235 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36236 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36244 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36248 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36251 \begin_layout Standard
36252 \begin_inset Float figure
36259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36262 \begin_inset Tabular
36263 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36264 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36265 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36266 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36267 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36287 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36316 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36327 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36331 The normal text on the page goes here.
36332 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36334 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36335 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36340 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36378 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36407 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36430 name "fig:Page-layout"
36434 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36456 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36465 is set to “Default”.
36466 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36475 \begin_layout Subsection
36479 \begin_layout Standard
36480 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36481 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36482 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36483 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36485 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36487 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36490 \begin_layout Standard
36491 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36492 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36506 \begin_layout Description
36509 thepage prints the current page number
36512 \begin_layout Description
36515 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36518 \begin_layout Description
36521 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36524 \begin_layout Description
36527 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36528 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36535 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36538 because it usually goes in a left header.
36541 \begin_layout Description
36544 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36545 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36547 It is normally used in the right header.
36550 \begin_layout Subsection
36551 Default header/footer
36554 \begin_layout Standard
36555 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36556 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36557 footer has the page number.
36558 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36559 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36560 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36563 \begin_inset space ~
36571 \begin_layout Subsection
36575 \begin_layout Standard
36576 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36577 Some pages are different.
36578 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36579 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36580 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36581 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36582 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36586 Header and footer decoration line
36589 \begin_layout Standard
36590 By default, you get a 0.4
36591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36594 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36595 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36607 in the following way:
36610 \begin_layout Standard
36617 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36620 \begin_layout Standard
36621 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36634 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36641 \begin_layout Standard
36642 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36644 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36645 \begin_inset space ~
36649 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36660 Several header/footer lines
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36665 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36666 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36668 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36684 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36686 \begin_inset space ~
36694 \begin_layout Standard
36701 headheight}{height}
36704 \begin_layout Standard
36709 is a size in standard units (e.
36710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36714 \begin_inset space \space{}
36722 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36723 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36724 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36725 logfile with the menu
36727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36737 \begin_inset space ~
36742 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36747 \begin_inset Index idx
36750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36752 packages ! fancyhdr
36758 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36759 for your header/footer.
36762 \begin_layout Subsection
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36768 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36769 This example consists of the following definition:
36772 \begin_layout Description
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36783 , empty optional argument
36786 \begin_layout Description
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36791 Header empty, empty optional argument
36794 \begin_layout Description
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36805 in the optional argument
36808 \begin_layout Description
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36819 in the optional argument
36822 \begin_layout Description
36824 \begin_inset space ~
36837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36841 \begin_inset Newline newline
36845 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36852 in the optional argument
36855 \begin_layout Description
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36866 , empty optional argument
36869 \begin_layout Description
36872 headrulewidth set to 2
36873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36879 \begin_layout Standard
36880 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36881 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36887 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36898 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36912 pagestyle{headings}
36918 \begin_inset Note Note
36921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36922 switches back to page style with the default headings
36930 \begin_layout Section
36931 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36934 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36939 \begin_inset Index idx
36942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36949 \begin_inset Index idx
36952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36961 \begin_layout Standard
36963 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36964 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36965 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36968 \begin_layout Subsection
36972 \begin_layout Standard
36973 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36979 \begin_inset Index idx
36982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36984 packages ! preview-latex
36989 (on some systems named simply
36994 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36996 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37003 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37005 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37013 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37014 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37015 -package are automatically
37016 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37020 \begin_layout Subsection
37024 \begin_layout Standard
37025 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37026 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37028 activate the option
37031 \begin_inset space ~
37038 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37044 \begin_inset space ~
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37051 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37058 \begin_inset space ~
37071 \begin_inset space ~
37076 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37085 \begin_inset space ~
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37101 \begin_layout Standard
37102 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37103 and when you finish
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37116 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37117 generated by activating the option
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37126 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37134 \begin_layout Subsection
37135 Selected document parts
37138 \begin_layout Standard
37139 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37140 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37141 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37142 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37144 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37150 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37151 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37152 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37155 \begin_layout Standard
37156 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37163 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37175 is explained in section
37177 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37182 \begin_inset space ~
37192 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37193 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37194 the final rotated boxes,
37195 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37196 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37198 Here is the result:
37201 \begin_layout Standard
37202 \begin_inset Preview
37204 \begin_layout Standard
37209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37213 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37219 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37229 height_special "totalheight"
37234 backgroundcolor "none"
37237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37262 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37268 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37290 \begin_layout Standard
37291 Previewing works also for colors.
37292 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37311 is explained in section
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37331 \begin_layout Standard
37332 \begin_inset Preview
37334 \begin_layout Standard
37338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37357 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37362 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37388 \begin_layout Standard
37389 If \SpecialChar LyX
37390 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37391 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37392 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37393 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37394 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37395 the \SpecialChar TeX
37397 If \SpecialChar LyX
37398 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37399 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37401 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37402 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37403 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37406 \begin_layout Subsection
37411 \begin_layout Standard
37412 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37413 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37416 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37423 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37425 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37427 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37428 's main window, then only this selection
37429 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37430 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37431 the source view window.
37436 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37437 ; but note that if you have
37438 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37440 not just the one which is open at the time.
37443 \begin_layout Section
37444 Advanced Find and Replace
37445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37447 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37452 \begin_inset Index idx
37455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37462 \begin_inset Index idx
37465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37474 \begin_layout Subsection
37478 \begin_layout Standard
37479 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37480 allows for searching of complex,
37481 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37483 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37484 The key-features are:
37487 \begin_layout Itemize
37488 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37489 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37490 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37494 \begin_layout Itemize
37495 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37496 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37497 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37498 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37501 \begin_layout Itemize
37502 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37503 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37504 outside of mathematics environments
37507 \begin_layout Itemize
37508 Search may be widened to a specific
37513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37520 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37521 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37528 \begin_layout Itemize
37529 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37530 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37538 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37541 \begin_layout Subsection
37545 \begin_layout Standard
37546 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37561 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37564 ) or the toolbar button
37567 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37573 Advanced Find and Replace
37578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37582 \begin_layout Standard
37588 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37597 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37600 arg "paragraph-break"
37604 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37605 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37609 arg "paragraph-break"
37612 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37616 searches backwards.
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37628 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37642 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37645 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37646 Searching for mathematics
37649 \begin_layout Standard
37650 Mathematical formulas, such as
37651 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37654 or something more complex like
37655 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37658 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37663 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37664 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37665 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37666 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37676 \begin_layout Standard
37677 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37678 This is done by switching to the
37682 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37687 This way, entering in the
37694 \begin_layout Itemize
37695 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37696 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37699 \begin_layout Itemize
37700 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37701 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37704 \begin_layout Itemize
37705 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37706 of it only within section headings.
37707 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37708 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37712 \begin_layout Itemize
37713 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37714 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37717 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37721 \begin_layout Standard
37722 The entries made in the
37726 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37729 \begin_inset space ~
37735 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37739 button or alternatively press
37742 arg "paragraph-break"
37749 while the cursor is in the
37752 \begin_inset space ~
37760 \begin_layout Standard
37761 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37763 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37767 \begin_layout Itemize
37768 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37769 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37777 with its typewriter version
37778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37792 \begin_layout Itemize
37793 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37799 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37811 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37818 (you may want to enable the
37821 \begin_inset space ~
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37834 options and disable the
37842 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37850 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37851 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37855 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37858 , or occurrences of
37859 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37863 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37869 \begin_layout Subsection
37873 \begin_layout Standard
37874 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37879 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37881 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37883 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37893 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37899 This is done with the context menu
37901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37902 Insert Regular Expression
37904 while the cursor is in the
37909 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37910 expression matching rules
37914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37915 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37925 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37926 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37932 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37933 same text in the document.
37934 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37935 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37938 \begin_layout Enumerate
37939 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37944 editor the fraction
37945 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37949 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37952 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37953 fractions with the given denominator.
37956 \begin_layout Enumerate
37957 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37969 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37974 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37975 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37976 Also, by inserting a
37977 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37980 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37981 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37984 \begin_layout Standard
37985 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37986 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37987 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37990 , and referring back to them through
37991 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37995 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37999 For example, try searching with the regexp
38000 \begin_inset Newline newline
38003 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38006 \begin_inset Newline newline
38009 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
38012 \begin_layout Standard
38013 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38016 \begin_layout Standard
38017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38026 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38027 sub-expressions is absolute.
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38033 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38036 always refers to the first occurrence of
38037 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38040 in all entered regexps.
38048 \begin_layout Section
38050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38052 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38057 \begin_inset Index idx
38060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38069 \begin_layout Standard
38071 has a built-in spell checker.
38074 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38081 key or the toolbar button
38084 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38087 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38088 beginning of the currently selected text.
38089 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38090 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38091 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38092 scrolled so that it is visible.
38093 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38094 n, if any could be found.
38095 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38099 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38100 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38103 \begin_layout Standard
38104 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38111 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38112 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38114 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38115 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38126 arg "dialog-show character"
38129 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38131 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38135 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38136 can be downloaded from here:
38137 \begin_inset Newline newline
38141 \begin_inset Flex URL
38144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38148 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38149 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38150 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38158 \begin_inset Newline newline
38162 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38164 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38165 You should download
38168 \begin_inset space ~
38171 files for each language
38172 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38177 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38180 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38181 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38185 \begin_inset space ~
38188 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38189 's installation subfolder
38197 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38199 \begin_inset Newline newline
38202 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38203 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38204 but in most cases these are
38220 is the language code.
38223 \begin_layout Subsection
38227 \begin_layout Standard
38230 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38231 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38233 \begin_inset space ~
38236 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38239 you can set the following things:
38242 \begin_layout Description
38244 \begin_inset space ~
38247 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38248 should use for spell checking.
38249 Depending on your platform,
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38260 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38261 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38276 \begin_inset space ~
38279 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38282 \begin_layout Description
38284 \begin_inset space ~
38287 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38288 will always use the given language
38289 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38292 \begin_layout Description
38294 \begin_inset space ~
38297 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38303 \begin_inset space \space{}
38307 This should normally not be needed.
38310 \begin_layout Description
38312 \begin_inset space ~
38316 \begin_inset space ~
38319 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38331 \begin_layout Description
38333 \begin_inset space ~
38336 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38337 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38338 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38339 appear in a context menu.
38340 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38344 \begin_layout Description
38346 \begin_inset space ~
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38354 \begin_inset space ~
38357 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38361 \begin_layout Section
38363 \begin_inset Index idx
38366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38375 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38382 \begin_layout Standard
38384 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38385 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38395 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38397 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38407 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38409 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38410 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38411 which are available for many languages.
38414 \begin_layout Standard
38415 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38416 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38420 \begin_layout Subsection
38421 Setting up the thesaurus
38424 \begin_layout Standard
38433 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38437 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38442 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38448 \begin_inset space ~
38456 For instance, the US English files are named:
38459 \begin_layout Itemize
38463 \begin_layout Itemize
38467 \begin_layout Standard
38476 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38477 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38480 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38481 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38482 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38484 \begin_inset space ~
38489 ) to the path where they are installed.
38493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38494 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38495 ies, typical locations are
38501 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38505 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38509 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38512 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38518 LibreOffice-<Version>
38525 On the Mac, the default location is
38527 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38528 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38529 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38530 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38531 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38532 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38540 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38541 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38542 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38546 \begin_layout Standard
38547 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38549 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
38551 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
38554 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
38555 \begin_inset Newline newline
38559 \begin_inset Flex URL
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38564 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
38566 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38567 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
38568 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
38578 \begin_layout Standard
38579 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38580 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38583 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38584 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38586 \begin_inset space ~
38591 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38593 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38594 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38598 \begin_layout Standard
38599 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38601 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38604 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38610 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38613 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38614 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38622 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38623 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38624 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38626 \begin_inset space ~
38631 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38634 \begin_layout Subsection
38635 Using the thesaurus
38638 \begin_layout Standard
38639 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38641 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38644 or the toolbar button
38647 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38650 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38652 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38654 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38655 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38656 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38665 ), related terms (such as
38668 \begin_inset space ~
38677 ), compounds (such as
38680 \begin_inset space ~
38689 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38698 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38701 \begin_layout Standard
38702 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38703 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38707 \begin_layout Standard
38708 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38709 the dictionary, such as the above
38713 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38718 \begin_inset space \space{}
38721 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38722 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38723 For example, looking up the word form
38727 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38732 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38737 \begin_inset space \space{}
38748 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38749 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38750 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38753 \begin_layout Section
38755 \begin_inset Index idx
38758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38765 \begin_inset Index idx
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 Document ! Change Tracking
38775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38777 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38784 \begin_layout Standard
38785 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38786 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38787 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38788 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38792 \begin_inset space ~
38795 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38797 \begin_inset space ~
38805 \begin_layout Standard
38806 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38820 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38821 You can change the color in
38823 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38824 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38826 \begin_inset space ~
38830 \begin_inset space ~
38835 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38841 \begin_inset Index idx
38844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38845 Color ! Change tracking
38850 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38851 's status bar when the
38852 cursor is in changed text.
38853 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38856 arg "changes-merge"
38862 \begin_layout Standard
38863 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38865 \begin_inset Index idx
38868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38877 \begin_layout Standard
38878 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38884 \begin_layout Standard
38885 \begin_inset Graphics
38886 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38894 \begin_layout Standard
38895 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38901 \begin_layout Standard
38902 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38905 \begin_layout Standard
38906 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38912 \begin_layout Standard
38913 \begin_inset Tabular
38914 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38915 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38916 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38917 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 arg "changes-track"
38935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38946 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38966 arg "changes-output"
38974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38985 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38987 \begin_inset space ~
38991 \begin_inset space ~
38995 \begin_inset space ~
39004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39025 Jumps to the next change
39031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39040 arg "change-accept"
39048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39059 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39079 arg "change-reject"
39087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39098 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39100 \begin_inset space ~
39109 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39118 arg "changes-merge"
39126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39137 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39148 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 arg "all-changes-accept"
39165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39173 \begin_inset space ~
39176 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39182 \begin_inset space ~
39191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 arg "all-changes-reject"
39208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39216 \begin_inset space ~
39219 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39225 \begin_inset space ~
39234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39258 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39260 \begin_inset space ~
39269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39292 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39294 \begin_inset space ~
39310 \begin_layout Standard
39311 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39317 \begin_layout Standard
39318 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39338 \begin_layout Standard
39339 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39340 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39341 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39342 the next change after the current cursor position.
39343 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39344 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39345 step to the next change.
39346 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39349 \begin_layout Standard
39350 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39351 to describe a change.
39354 \begin_layout Standard
39356 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39357 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39363 \begin_inset Index idx
39366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39374 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39383 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39389 \begin_layout Section
39390 Comparison of Documents
39391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39393 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39398 \begin_inset Index idx
39401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39402 Comparison of documents
39410 \begin_layout Standard
39411 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39414 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39418 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39419 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39421 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39423 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39427 \begin_inset space ~
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39435 \begin_inset space ~
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39448 \begin_inset space ~
39452 \begin_inset space ~
39456 \begin_inset space ~
39460 \begin_inset space ~
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39469 enables the change tracking option
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_inset space ~
39480 \begin_inset space ~
39485 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39488 \begin_layout Section
39489 International Support
39490 \begin_inset Index idx
39493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39494 International support
39502 \begin_layout Standard
39503 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39504 with any language you want.
39505 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39506 up \SpecialChar LyX
39508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39510 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39518 \begin_layout Standard
39519 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39520 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39527 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39534 \begin_layout Subsection
39536 \begin_inset Index idx
39539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39546 \begin_inset Index idx
39549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39550 Document ! Settings
39556 \begin_inset Index idx
39559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39560 Document ! Language
39568 \begin_layout Standard
39571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39572 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39575 dialog lets you set
39577 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39582 \begin_layout Standard
39587 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39592 \begin_inset space ~
39597 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39598 For details about the different encoding options see section
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39605 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39612 \begin_layout Subsection
39613 Keyboard mapping configuration
39614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39616 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39623 \begin_layout Standard
39624 If you have for example a U.
39625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39628 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39629 can use an alternate keymap.
39630 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39635 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39636 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39637 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39640 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39641 \begin_inset space ~
39645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39647 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39652 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39653 which one you want to use.
39656 \begin_layout Standard
39657 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39658 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39659 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39663 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39664 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39665 one to support the characters you want.
39666 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39673 \begin_layout Chapter
39676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39678 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39685 \begin_layout Standard
39686 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39687 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39688 topic inside the user's guide.
39691 \begin_layout Section
39693 \begin_inset Index idx
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39705 \begin_layout Standard
39710 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39713 \begin_layout Subsection
39717 \begin_layout Standard
39718 Creates a new document.
39721 \begin_layout Subsection
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39727 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39728 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39730 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39731 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39737 \begin_layout Subsection
39741 \begin_layout Standard
39745 \begin_layout Subsection
39749 \begin_layout Standard
39750 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39751 Click there on a file to open it.
39754 \begin_layout Subsection
39756 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39760 \begin_layout Standard
39762 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39763 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39767 \begin_layout Subsection
39771 \begin_layout Standard
39772 Closes the current document.
39775 \begin_layout Subsection
39779 \begin_layout Standard
39780 Closes all opened documents.
39783 \begin_layout Subsection
39787 \begin_layout Standard
39788 Saves the actual document.
39791 \begin_layout Subsection
39795 \begin_layout Standard
39796 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39797 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39803 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39807 \begin_layout Standard
39809 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39810 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39816 \begin_layout Subsection
39820 \begin_layout Standard
39821 Saves all opened documents.
39824 \begin_layout Subsection
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39829 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39832 \begin_layout Subsection
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39837 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39838 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39839 It is described in the section
39841 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39846 Additional Features
39851 \begin_layout Subsection
39855 \begin_layout Standard
39856 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39857 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39859 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39860 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39864 \begin_layout Standard
39865 When using the menu entry
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39873 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39877 \begin_inset space ~
39881 \begin_inset space ~
39885 \begin_inset space ~
39890 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39891 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39894 \begin_layout Subsection
39896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39898 name "subsec:Export"
39905 \begin_layout Standard
39906 You can export your document to various file formats.
39907 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39909 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39910 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39911 during its configuration.
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39915 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39923 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39930 \begin_layout Description
39936 \begin_inset space ~
39939 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39941 \begin_inset space ~
39944 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39945 \begin_inset Newline newline
39948 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39949 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39953 \begin_layout Description
39954 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39960 \begin_layout Description
39962 \begin_inset space ~
39965 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39971 \begin_layout Description
39972 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39973 's native DVI-format.
39974 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39975 files paths or file names in your document.
39977 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39984 \begin_layout Description
39985 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39986 in files paths or file names
39989 \begin_layout Description
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39998 ) DVI-format using the program
40000 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40003 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40007 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40015 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40023 \begin_layout Description
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40028 (cropped) the same as
40032 but with cropped page margins.
40035 \begin_layout Description
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40040 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40044 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40049 \begin_layout Description
40053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40061 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40069 \begin_layout Description
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40075 \begin_inset space ~
40078 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40082 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40090 \begin_layout Description
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40103 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40104 source that is compilable with the program
40106 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40110 \begin_layout Description
40114 \begin_inset space ~
40119 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40120 source, additionally all images used in the document
40121 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40125 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40128 \begin_layout Description
40132 \begin_inset space ~
40137 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40138 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40139 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40147 \begin_layout Description
40151 \begin_inset space ~
40160 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40161 source that is compilable with the program
40167 \begin_layout Description
40169 \begin_inset space ~
40173 \begin_inset space ~
40180 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40181 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40187 \begin_layout Description
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40192 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40193 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40199 \begin_inset space \space{}
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40223 represent the version number)
40226 \begin_layout Description
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40235 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40236 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40237 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40241 \begin_layout Description
40242 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40243 's internal XHTML engine
40246 \begin_layout Description
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40263 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40268 For the conversion the program
40277 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40280 \begin_layout Description
40281 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40286 \begin_layout Description
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40291 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40293 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40296 For the conversion the program
40305 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40308 \begin_layout Description
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40313 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40314 For the conversion the program
40323 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40326 \begin_layout Description
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40331 (cropped) the same as
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40339 but with cropped page margins
40342 \begin_layout Description
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40351 PDF-format using the program
40355 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40358 \begin_layout Description
40362 \begin_inset space ~
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40379 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40384 \begin_inset space \space{}
40387 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40391 \begin_layout Description
40395 \begin_inset space ~
40400 PDF-format using the program
40402 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40405 , produces PDF-files directly
40408 \begin_layout Description
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40417 PDF-format using the program
40421 , produces PDF-files directly
40424 \begin_layout Description
40428 \begin_inset space ~
40433 PDF-format using the program
40437 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40440 \begin_layout Description
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40449 PDF-format using the program
40454 , produces PDF-files directly
40457 \begin_layout Description
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40469 \begin_layout Description
40473 \begin_inset space ~
40477 \begin_inset space ~
40482 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40483 and then exported as text using the program
40488 \begin_layout Description
40493 PostScript format using the program
40501 options see section
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40508 reference "subsec:General-output"
40515 \begin_layout Description
40516 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40517 source and also code in the statistical programming
40531 it is possible to use
40535 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40539 \begin_layout Standard
40540 If one of the menu entries
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40556 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40558 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40566 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40571 \begin_inset Index idx
40574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40575 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40584 \begin_layout Subsection
40588 \begin_layout Standard
40589 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40590 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40599 reference "sec:Paths"
40604 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40613 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40614 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40615 's preferences as described in section
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40622 reference "subsec:Converters"
40629 \begin_layout Subsection
40630 New and Close Window
40633 \begin_layout Standard
40634 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40638 \begin_layout Subsection
40642 \begin_layout Standard
40643 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40646 \begin_layout Section
40648 \begin_inset Index idx
40651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40660 \begin_layout Subsection
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40665 Described in section
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40672 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40679 \begin_layout Subsection
40680 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40683 \begin_layout Standard
40684 Described in section
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40691 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40698 \begin_layout Subsection
40702 \begin_layout Standard
40703 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40704 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40707 \begin_layout Subsection
40711 \begin_layout Standard
40712 Selects the whole document.
40715 \begin_layout Subsection
40716 Find & Replace (Quick)
40719 \begin_layout Standard
40720 Described in section
40721 \begin_inset space ~
40725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40727 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40734 \begin_layout Subsection
40735 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40738 \begin_layout Standard
40739 Described in section
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40746 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40753 \begin_layout Subsection
40754 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40757 \begin_layout Standard
40758 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40762 \begin_layout Subsection
40764 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40768 \begin_layout Standard
40770 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40771 Described in section
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40778 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40787 \begin_layout Subsection
40789 \begin_inset Index idx
40792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40793 Paragraph ! Settings
40801 \begin_layout Standard
40802 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40803 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40807 \begin_layout Standard
40808 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40809 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40816 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40824 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40828 \begin_layout Subsection
40830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40834 \begin_layout Standard
40836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40837 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40842 \begin_layout Enumerate
40844 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40845 Customize text properties by means of the
40851 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40854 ; this is described in section
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40861 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40868 \begin_layout Enumerate
40870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40871 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40873 Apply last settings
40876 \begin_layout Enumerate
40878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40879 Change the casing of selected text (
40894 \begin_layout Subsection
40896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40900 \begin_layout Standard
40902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40903 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40904 text styles (in the case of this document:
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40932 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40941 \begin_layout Subsection
40942 Table and Rows & Columns
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40946 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40947 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40948 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40951 \begin_layout Subsection
40955 \begin_layout Standard
40956 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40957 It will dissolve this inset.
40958 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40962 \begin_layout Subsection
40966 \begin_layout Standard
40967 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40968 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40971 \begin_layout Subsection
40972 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40975 \begin_layout Standard
40976 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40978 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40985 reference "sec:Nesting"
40990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40992 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40999 \begin_layout Section
41001 \begin_inset Index idx
41004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41013 \begin_layout Standard
41014 At the bottom of the
41018 menu the opened documents are listed.
41021 \begin_layout Subsection
41022 Open/Close all Insets
41025 \begin_layout Standard
41026 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41029 \begin_layout Subsection
41030 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41033 \begin_layout Standard
41034 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41037 \begin_layout Standard
41038 Math macros are described in the
41045 \begin_layout Subsection
41049 \begin_layout Standard
41050 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41057 reference "sec:Navigating"
41062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41064 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41071 \begin_layout Subsection
41075 \begin_layout Standard
41076 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41084 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41091 \begin_layout Subsection
41095 \begin_layout Standard
41096 Opens a window showing console messages.
41097 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41102 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41103 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41104 is processing the document.
41107 \begin_layout Subsection
41109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41111 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41116 \begin_inset Index idx
41119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41128 \begin_layout Standard
41129 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41131 All toolbars and the
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41152 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41154 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
41156 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
41160 \begin_layout Standard
41162 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
41166 \begin_inset space ~
41184 \begin_inset space ~
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41201 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41204 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
41208 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
41210 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
41224 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
41225 denoted in the menu with the suffix
41234 \begin_layout Standard
41239 state the toolbar is permanently shown
41240 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
41245 state it is never shown
41251 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41252 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41253 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41254 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41255 is inside a formula or table respectively
41256 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
41257 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
41262 \begin_layout Standard
41264 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41271 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41278 \begin_layout Subsection
41282 \begin_layout Standard
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41290 \begin_inset space ~
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41311 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41312 's main window vertically while
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41335 \begin_inset space ~
41340 will split it horizontally.
41341 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41342 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41343 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41344 three or more documents at the same time.
41345 To close a split view, use the menu
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41360 \begin_layout Subsection
41364 \begin_layout Standard
41365 Closes a split view.
41368 \begin_layout Subsection
41372 \begin_layout Standard
41373 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41374 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41375 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41376 's main window fullscreen.
41377 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41378 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41381 \begin_layout Section
41383 \begin_inset Index idx
41386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41395 \begin_layout Subsection
41399 \begin_layout Standard
41400 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41407 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41418 \begin_layout Subsection
41420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41422 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 Here you can insert the following characters:
41433 \begin_layout Description
41438 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41441 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41442 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41443 -packages you have installed.
41444 You can get a complete display by checking
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_inset Newline newline
41457 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41465 Not all characters will be visible in the
41469 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41470 dialog (see section
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41477 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41481 ) can display every character.
41489 \begin_layout Description
41490 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41494 \begin_layout Description
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41503 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41510 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41517 \begin_layout Description
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41522 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41525 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41526 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41532 \begin_layout Description
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41537 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41547 \begin_layout Description
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41552 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41556 \begin_layout Description
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41561 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41565 \begin_layout Description
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41572 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41578 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41583 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41589 \begin_inset space \space{}
41592 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41593 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41602 To insert a fraction use the command
41607 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41611 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41620 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41627 \begin_layout Description
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41632 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41636 \begin_layout Description
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset Index idx
41645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41652 \begin_inset Index idx
41655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41656 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41661 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41662 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41664 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41670 \begin_inset Index idx
41673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41681 \begin_inset Newline newline
41684 More information about this feature can be found in the
41690 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41696 \begin_layout Description
41697 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41699 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41700 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41704 \begin_layout Subsection
41708 \begin_layout Standard
41709 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41712 \begin_layout Description
41713 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41714 \begin_inset script superscript
41716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41725 \begin_layout Description
41726 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41727 \begin_inset script subscript
41729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41738 \begin_layout Description
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41743 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41750 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41757 \begin_layout Description
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41762 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41763 \begin_inset space ~
41767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41769 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41776 \begin_layout Description
41778 \begin_inset space ~
41781 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41788 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41795 \begin_layout Description
41797 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41802 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41808 \begin_inset space \space{}
41811 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41812 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41821 To insert a fraction use the command
41826 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41830 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41839 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41848 \begin_layout Description
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41853 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41854 \begin_inset space ~
41858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41860 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41867 \begin_layout Description
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41872 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41873 \begin_inset space ~
41877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41879 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41886 \begin_layout Description
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41891 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41898 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41905 \begin_layout Description
41906 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41913 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41920 \begin_layout Description
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41925 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41926 \begin_inset space ~
41930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41932 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41939 \begin_layout Description
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41944 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41951 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41958 \begin_layout Description
41960 \begin_inset space ~
41964 \begin_inset space ~
41967 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41976 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41983 for a usage example.
41986 \begin_layout Description
41988 \begin_inset space ~
41992 \begin_inset space ~
41995 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41996 \begin_inset space ~
42000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42002 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42009 \begin_layout Description
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42014 Break Inserts a forced line break that
42015 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
42018 justifies the remaining text as described in section
42019 \begin_inset space ~
42023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42025 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42032 \begin_layout Description
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42037 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42044 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42051 \begin_layout Description
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42056 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
42057 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
42059 \begin_inset space ~
42063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42065 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42070 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
42074 \begin_layout Description
42076 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_inset space ~
42085 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
42086 to prevent a page break at the given position.
42088 \begin_inset space ~
42092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42094 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
42103 \begin_layout Description
42105 \begin_inset space ~
42108 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42115 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42122 \begin_layout Description
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42131 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42138 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42145 \begin_layout Subsection
42147 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
42151 \begin_layout Standard
42153 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
42154 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
42155 The submenu allows you to insert
42158 \begin_layout Description
42160 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
42162 \begin_inset space ~
42165 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
42168 \begin_layout Description
42170 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42176 \begin_inset space ~
42179 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
42183 \begin_layout Description
42185 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42190 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
42193 \begin_layout Description
42195 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
42197 \begin_inset space ~
42200 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42203 \begin_layout Description
42205 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42211 \begin_inset space ~
42214 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42218 \begin_layout Description
42220 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42222 \begin_inset space ~
42225 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42228 \begin_layout Description
42230 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42232 \begin_inset space ~
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42243 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42246 \begin_layout Description
42248 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42253 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42255 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42256 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42262 \begin_layout Description
42264 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42266 \begin_inset space ~
42269 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42271 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42272 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42278 \begin_layout Description
42280 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42281 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42282 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42283 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42286 \begin_layout Subsection
42289 List/Contents/References
42292 \begin_layout Standard
42293 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42297 \begin_inset space ~
42318 are described in section
42319 \begin_inset space ~
42323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42325 reference "sec:toc"
42334 is described in section
42335 \begin_inset space ~
42339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42341 reference "sec:Index"
42349 is described in section
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42356 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42362 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42365 is described in section
42366 \begin_inset space ~
42370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42372 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42379 \begin_layout Subsection
42383 \begin_layout Standard
42384 To insert floats, as described in section
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42391 reference "sec:Floats"
42395 and in detail the chapter
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42410 \begin_layout Subsection
42414 \begin_layout Standard
42415 To insert notes, described in section
42416 \begin_inset space ~
42420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42422 reference "sec:Notes"
42429 \begin_layout Subsection
42433 \begin_layout Standard
42434 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42436 Branches are described in section
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42443 reference "sec:Branches"
42450 \begin_layout Subsection
42454 \begin_layout Standard
42455 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42456 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42458 An example is the document class
42459 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42469 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42478 with three custom insets.
42481 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42485 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42491 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42494 \begin_layout Subsection
42496 \begin_inset Index idx
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42508 \begin_layout Standard
42509 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42511 For more information see chapter
42513 External Document Parts
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42522 \begin_layout Subsection
42524 \begin_inset Index idx
42527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42536 \begin_layout Standard
42537 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42538 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42545 \begin_inset space ~
42553 \begin_layout Subsection
42557 \begin_layout Standard
42562 dialog as described in section
42563 \begin_inset space ~
42567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42569 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42576 \begin_layout Subsection
42580 \begin_layout Standard
42585 as described in section
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42592 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42599 \begin_layout Subsection
42603 \begin_layout Standard
42608 as described in section
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42615 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42622 \begin_layout Subsection
42624 \begin_inset Index idx
42627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42634 \begin_inset Index idx
42637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42638 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42646 \begin_layout Standard
42647 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42648 Floats are described in section
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42655 reference "sec:Floats"
42659 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42662 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42678 \begin_layout Subsection
42682 \begin_layout Standard
42683 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42690 reference "sec:Index"
42697 \begin_layout Subsection
42701 \begin_layout Standard
42702 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42709 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42716 \begin_layout Subsection
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42722 Tables are described in section
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42729 reference "sec:Tables"
42733 and in detail in the chapter
42740 \begin_inset space ~
42748 \begin_layout Subsection
42752 \begin_layout Standard
42758 Graphics are described in section
42759 \begin_inset space ~
42763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42765 reference "sec:Graphics"
42772 \begin_layout Subsection
42776 \begin_layout Standard
42777 Inserts a URL as described in section
42778 \begin_inset space ~
42782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42784 reference "subsec:URLs"
42791 \begin_layout Subsection
42795 \begin_layout Standard
42796 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42803 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42810 \begin_layout Subsection
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42815 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42822 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42829 \begin_layout Subsection
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42835 \begin_inset space ~
42839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42841 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42848 \begin_layout Subsection
42851 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42854 \begin_layout Standard
42855 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42856 environments of the same type.
42858 \begin_inset space ~
42862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42864 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42868 for an explanation.
42871 \begin_layout Subsection
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42876 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42877 title or caption of a float.
42878 Inserts a short title as described in section
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42885 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42892 \begin_layout Subsection
42897 \begin_layout Standard
42898 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42899 Code box as described in section
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42906 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42913 \begin_layout Subsection
42915 \begin_inset Index idx
42918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42927 \begin_layout Standard
42928 Inserts a program listings box.
42929 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42931 Program Code Listings
42936 \begin_inset space ~
42944 \begin_layout Subsection
42946 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42950 \begin_layout Standard
42952 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42953 Inserts the actual date.
42954 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42961 \begin_layout Subsection
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42966 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42967 \begin_inset space ~
42971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42973 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42980 \begin_layout Section
42982 \begin_inset Index idx
42985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42994 \begin_layout Standard
42995 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42996 \begin_inset space ~
42999 of the current document.
43000 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43003 \begin_layout Subsection
43007 \begin_layout Standard
43008 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43009 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
43010 to jump, for example, between section
43011 \begin_inset space ~
43015 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
43016 \begin_inset space ~
43019 2.5 and use the submenu
43022 \begin_inset space ~
43026 \begin_inset space ~
43033 \begin_inset space ~
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43043 \begin_inset space ~
43049 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
43053 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43059 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43062 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43065 \begin_layout Standard
43066 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43070 \begin_inset space ~
43075 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43078 \begin_inset space ~
43083 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43086 \begin_layout Subsection
43087 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43091 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
43095 \begin_layout Subsection
43099 \begin_layout Standard
43100 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43101 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43102 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43110 \begin_inset space ~
43118 \begin_layout Subsection
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43123 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43126 The \SpecialChar LyX
43127 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43129 \begin_inset space ~
43137 \begin_inset space ~
43142 manual for a detailed description.
43145 \begin_layout Section
43147 \begin_inset Index idx
43150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43159 \begin_layout Subsection
43163 \begin_layout Standard
43164 Change Tracking is described in section
43165 \begin_inset space ~
43169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43171 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43178 \begin_layout Subsection
43186 \begin_layout Standard
43187 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43188 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43189 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43191 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43192 to the clipboard or update the view.
43193 \begin_inset Newline newline
43196 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43200 \begin_layout Standard
43203 Open Containing Directory
43205 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43206 's temporary folder for the document.
43207 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43208 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43209 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43210 For example some journals require to send the
43214 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43218 \begin_layout Subsection
43219 Start Appendix Here
43222 \begin_layout Standard
43223 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43224 as described in section
43225 \begin_inset space ~
43229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43231 reference "sec:Appendices"
43238 \begin_layout Subsection
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43246 \begin_layout Standard
43247 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43248 default output format for the document (menu
43250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43251 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43252 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43254 \begin_inset space ~
43258 \begin_inset space ~
43264 \begin_inset space ~
43268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43270 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43274 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43278 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43280 \begin_inset space ~
43283 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43285 \begin_inset space ~
43288 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43290 \begin_inset space ~
43294 \begin_inset space ~
43300 \begin_inset space ~
43304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43306 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43310 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43311 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43313 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43314 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43316 \begin_inset space ~
43319 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43324 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43328 \begin_inset space ~
43332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43334 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43339 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43340 when it is first configured.
43341 The default output format is
43344 \begin_inset space ~
43352 \begin_layout Subsection
43353 View (Other Formats)
43356 \begin_layout Standard
43357 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43358 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43359 actual document with an external program.
43360 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43361 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43362 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43364 All possible formats are listed in section
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43371 reference "subsec:Export"
43376 You should at least see the menu entry
43381 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43383 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43385 \begin_inset space ~
43389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43391 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43396 \begin_inset Index idx
43399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43400 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43409 \begin_layout Standard
43410 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43411 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43413 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43414 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43419 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43424 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43434 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43439 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43440 when it is first configured.
43443 \begin_layout Subsection
43445 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_layout Standard
43452 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43453 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43456 \begin_layout Subsection
43457 Update (Other Formats)
43460 \begin_layout Standard
43461 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43462 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43465 \begin_layout Subsection
43466 View Master Document
43469 \begin_layout Standard
43470 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43486 \begin_inset space ~
43491 manual for more information on this topic).
43492 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43493 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43506 generates the output of the whole book, while
43510 will just output the chapter alone.
43513 \begin_layout Standard
43514 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43515 in the document settings (menu
43517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43518 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43519 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43525 \begin_inset space ~
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43537 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43541 ) or in the preferences (menu
43543 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43544 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43549 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43551 \begin_inset space ~
43554 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43560 \begin_inset space ~
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43572 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43579 \begin_layout Subsection
43580 Update Master Document
43583 \begin_layout Standard
43584 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43605 manual for more information on this topic).
43606 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43607 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43610 \begin_layout Standard
43611 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43612 in the document settings (menu
43614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43615 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43616 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43618 \begin_inset space ~
43622 \begin_inset space ~
43628 \begin_inset space ~
43632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43634 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43638 ) or in the preferences (menu
43640 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43641 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43643 \begin_inset space ~
43646 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43648 \begin_inset space ~
43651 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43653 \begin_inset space ~
43657 \begin_inset space ~
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43669 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43676 \begin_layout Subsection
43678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43680 name "subsec:Compressed"
43687 \begin_layout Standard
43688 Un/compresses the current document.
43689 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43690 compression (see the
43692 Additional Features
43694 manual for details).
43697 \begin_layout Subsection
43701 \begin_layout Standard
43702 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43705 \begin_layout Subsection
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43710 The document settings are described in appendix
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43717 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43724 \begin_layout Section
43726 \begin_inset Index idx
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43738 \begin_layout Subsection
43742 \begin_layout Standard
43743 Spell checking is explained in section
43744 \begin_inset space ~
43748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43750 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43757 \begin_layout Subsection
43761 \begin_layout Standard
43762 The thesaurus is described in section
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43769 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43776 \begin_layout Subsection
43778 \begin_inset Index idx
43781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43788 \begin_inset Index idx
43791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43800 \begin_layout Standard
43801 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43802 the highlighted document part.
43805 \begin_layout Subsection
43811 \begin_inset Index idx
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43824 \begin_layout Standard
43825 Generates with the help of the program
43827 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43830 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43831 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43832 This feature is not available on Windows.
43835 \begin_layout Subsection
43841 \begin_inset Index idx
43844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43854 \begin_layout Standard
43855 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43865 to see the full filename paths.
43868 \begin_layout Subsection
43870 \begin_inset Index idx
43873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43882 \begin_layout Standard
43883 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43884 files as described in section
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43891 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43898 \begin_layout Subsection
43900 \begin_inset Index idx
43903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43916 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43934 \begin_inset Index idx
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43938 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43947 \begin_layout Standard
43948 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43949 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43950 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43951 -packages and programs it needs; see
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43959 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43966 \begin_layout Subsection
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43975 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43976 \begin_inset space ~
43980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43982 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43989 \begin_layout Section
43991 \begin_inset Index idx
43994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 \begin_layout Standard
44004 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44005 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44007 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
44011 \begin_layout Standard
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44020 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44021 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44022 packages and classes found
44023 by \SpecialChar LyX
44025 \begin_inset space ~
44029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44031 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44038 \begin_layout Standard
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44047 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44052 \begin_layout Section
44054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44056 name "sec:Toolbars"
44063 \begin_layout Standard
44064 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44065 \begin_inset space ~
44069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44071 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44078 \begin_layout Standard
44079 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44080 This is described in the
44082 Additional Features
44087 \begin_layout Subsection
44089 \begin_inset Index idx
44092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 \begin_layout Standard
44102 \begin_inset Graphics
44103 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44111 \begin_layout Standard
44112 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44118 \begin_layout Standard
44119 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44136 \begin_inset Note Note
44139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44140 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44145 manual for more information.
44153 \begin_layout Standard
44154 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44160 \begin_layout Standard
44161 \begin_inset Tabular
44162 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44163 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44165 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44171 \begin_inset Graphics
44172 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44186 pull-down box for the environments
44199 \begin_layout Standard
44200 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44206 \begin_layout Standard
44208 \begin_inset Tabular
44209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44210 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44211 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44212 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44236 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44266 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44296 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44342 arg "spelling-continuously"
44350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44354 Spellcheck continuously
44360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44413 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44473 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44505 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44510 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44528 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44542 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44610 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44624 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44625 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44653 Emphasize text, function of the
44654 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44657 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44659 \begin_inset space ~
44662 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44664 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44670 arg "dialog-show character"
44681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44702 Set text to noun style, function of the
44703 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44706 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44711 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44713 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44719 arg "dialog-show character"
44730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44736 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44739 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44752 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44755 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44768 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44773 arg "textstyle-apply"
44783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44788 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44789 Format text using the current settings in the
44791 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44793 \begin_inset space ~
44796 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44831 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44833 \begin_inset space ~
44842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44851 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44879 arg "tabular-insert"
44887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44906 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44909 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44922 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44941 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44953 Toggle outline window on/off,
44955 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44971 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44998 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 Toggle table toolbar on/off
45023 \begin_layout Subsection
45025 \begin_inset Index idx
45028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45037 \begin_layout Standard
45038 \begin_inset Graphics
45039 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45047 \begin_layout Standard
45048 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45054 \begin_layout Standard
45055 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45059 \begin_layout Standard
45060 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45066 \begin_layout Standard
45067 \begin_inset Tabular
45068 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
45069 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45070 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45071 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45108 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
45116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45135 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45162 arg "layout-toggle List"
45170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45216 arg "depth-increment"
45224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45230 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45254 arg "depth-decrement"
45262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45270 \begin_inset space ~
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45292 arg "float-insert figure"
45300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45307 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45323 arg "float-insert table"
45331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45338 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45384 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45414 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45460 \begin_inset space ~
45469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45478 arg "nomencl-insert"
45486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45494 \begin_inset space ~
45503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45512 arg "footnote-insert"
45520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45542 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45591 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45720 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45736 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45751 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45753 \begin_inset space ~
45762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 arg "dialog-show character"
45779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45785 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45787 \begin_inset space ~
45790 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45803 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45808 arg "textstyle-apply"
45816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45821 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45822 Format text using the recent settings in the
45825 arg "dialog-show character"
45834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45843 arg "layout-paragraph"
45851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45859 \begin_inset space ~
45868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45877 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45891 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45905 \begin_layout Subsection
45906 View/Update Toolbar
45907 \begin_inset Index idx
45910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45911 Toolbar ! View / Update
45919 \begin_layout Standard
45920 \begin_inset Graphics
45921 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45928 \begin_layout Standard
45929 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45935 \begin_layout Standard
45936 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45940 \begin_layout Standard
45941 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45947 \begin_layout Standard
45948 \begin_inset Tabular
45949 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45950 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45951 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45952 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45992 arg "buffer-update"
46000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46022 arg "master-buffer-view"
46030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46038 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
46040 \begin_inset space ~
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 arg "master-buffer-update"
46072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46080 \begin_inset space ~
46084 \begin_inset space ~
46093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46102 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46117 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46119 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
46121 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
46124 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46125 Synchronize with Output
46131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46142 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
46152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46159 View (Other Formats)
46165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46172 arg "update-others"
46176 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
46184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46191 Update (Other Formats)
46204 \begin_layout Standard
46206 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46207 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46213 \begin_layout Subsection
46217 \begin_layout Standard
46218 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46219 \begin_inset space ~
46223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46225 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46229 , the table toolbar
46230 \begin_inset Index idx
46233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46247 manual and the math macro toolbar
46248 \begin_inset Index idx
46251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 \begin_layout Chapter
46265 The Document Settings
46266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46268 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46273 \begin_inset Index idx
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 Document ! Settings
46285 \begin_layout Standard
46289 \begin_inset space ~
46294 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46295 is called with the menu
46297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46301 You can save your document settings as default with the
46303 Save as Document Defaults
46305 button in any dialog.
46306 This will create a template named
46310 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46311 when you create a new document without
46315 \begin_layout Standard
46320 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46321 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46324 \begin_layout Standard
46325 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46326 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46327 to find the one you are looking for.
46328 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46329 the submenus of the dialog.
46331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46335 \begin_inset space \space{}
46339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46346 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46347 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46348 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46351 \begin_layout Section
46355 \begin_layout Standard
46356 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46358 Document classes are described in section
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46365 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46372 \begin_layout Standard
46376 \begin_inset space ~
46381 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46386 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46387 as a layout for a document class.
46388 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46390 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46399 \begin_layout Standard
46400 Some classes use special class options by default.
46401 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46405 and you can decide to use them or not.
46406 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46407 recommended you leave them untouched.
46412 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46413 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46418 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46420 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46427 \begin_inset Newline newline
46432 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46435 \begin_inset Newline newline
46438 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46439 distribution, see section
46444 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46446 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46459 \begin_layout Standard
46464 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46465 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46466 in the background if the child document
46467 is opened without its master.
46468 This way child documents are always compilable.
46469 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46476 \begin_inset space ~
46484 \begin_layout Standard
46485 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46496 \begin_inset Index idx
46499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46501 packages ! prettyref
46507 \begin_inset Index idx
46510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46512 packages ! refstyle
46517 for cross-references, see section
46518 \begin_inset space ~
46522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46524 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46531 \begin_layout Section
46535 \begin_layout Standard
46536 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46537 Please refer to the section
46540 \begin_inset space ~
46548 \begin_inset space ~
46553 manual for details.
46556 \begin_layout Section
46560 \begin_layout Standard
46561 Modules are explained in section
46562 \begin_inset space ~
46566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46568 reference "subsec:Modules"
46575 \begin_layout Section
46579 \begin_layout Standard
46581 \begin_inset space ~
46585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46587 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46594 \begin_layout Section
46598 \begin_layout Standard
46599 The document font settings are described in section
46600 \begin_inset space ~
46604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46606 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46613 \begin_layout Section
46617 \begin_layout Standard
46618 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46630 \begin_inset space ~
46635 and whether it should be a
46638 \begin_inset space ~
46643 can also be specified here.
46646 \begin_layout Standard
46647 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46648 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46649 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46651 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46654 \begin_layout Standard
46657 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46660 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46661 justifies the text on screen.
46662 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46664 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46670 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46679 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46684 \begin_layout Section
46688 \begin_layout Standard
46689 This dialog is described in sections
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46696 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46703 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46710 \begin_layout Section
46714 \begin_layout Standard
46715 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46716 \begin_inset space ~
46720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46722 reference "subsec:Margins"
46729 \begin_layout Section
46731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46733 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46738 \begin_inset Index idx
46741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46742 Language ! Encoding
46750 \begin_layout Standard
46751 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46752 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46753 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46755 is always encoded in utf8).
46756 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46757 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46758 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46759 -command is not known for
46760 a particular character).
46761 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46765 \begin_layout Standard
46767 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46768 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46769 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46770 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46771 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46772 's default encoding).
46773 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46774 's Unicode support covers the
46775 characters of most scripts.
46776 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46777 using one of the traditional, or
46778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46785 , encodings is necessary.
46788 \begin_layout Standard
46790 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46792 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46795 Traditional (auto-selected)
46801 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46802 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46803 the given language(s).
46805 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46809 \begin_layout Standard
46811 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46812 If you use the option
46817 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46820 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46821 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46824 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46827 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46828 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46829 exactly one encoding.
46830 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46835 \begin_layout Standard
46837 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46838 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46844 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46845 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46849 \begin_layout Standard
46851 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46852 Finally, you can also select
46856 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46857 Note that this encoding is then used for
46862 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46863 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46867 \begin_layout Standard
46869 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46872 Do not load inputenc
46874 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46875 from automatically loading the
46882 \begin_inset Index idx
46885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46887 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46889 packages ! inputenc
46897 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46898 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46899 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46900 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46901 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46903 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46909 Traditional (auto-selected)
46916 \begin_layout Standard
46918 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46920 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46921 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46922 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46923 installation supports Unicode), choose
46924 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46925 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46926 is quite incomplete, so
46927 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46932 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46933 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46934 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46935 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46936 -commands is not used, because all
46937 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46938 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46939 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46940 , two new alternative engines
46941 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46943 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46945 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46948 \begin_inset space ~
46956 \begin_inset space ~
46964 \begin_inset space ~
46970 \begin_inset space ~
46974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46976 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46981 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46985 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46990 \begin_layout Standard
46994 \begin_inset space ~
46999 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47000 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
47002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47010 The possible settings are:
47013 \begin_layout Description
47014 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47016 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47017 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47021 \begin_inset space ~
47025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47027 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47034 \begin_layout Description
47035 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
47036 format you will use.
47037 In many cases this will be
47042 \begin_inset Index idx
47045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47053 If the newer package
47058 \begin_inset Index idx
47061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47063 packages ! polyglossia
47068 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47069 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47070 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
47072 this package will be used instead of
47079 \begin_layout Description
47081 \begin_inset space ~
47092 would be more appropriate.
47095 \begin_layout Description
47096 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47097 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47101 (for German texts), type in
47104 \begin_inset Newline newline
47109 usepackage{ngerman}
47112 \begin_layout Description
47113 None will not use a language package.
47114 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47117 \begin_layout Standard
47118 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47121 \begin_layout Description
47123 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
47125 \begin_inset space ~
47129 \begin_inset space ~
47133 \begin_inset space ~
47140 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47146 \begin_inset Index idx
47149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47151 packages ! inputenc
47157 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47158 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47159 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47165 \begin_layout Description
47166 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47168 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47169 commands, which may result in a big
47170 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47171 -commands are needed.
47173 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
47174 This is the same as the
47187 \begin_layout Description
47189 \begin_inset space ~
47193 \begin_inset space ~
47196 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47199 \begin_layout Description
47201 \begin_inset space ~
47205 \begin_inset space ~
47208 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47211 \begin_layout Description
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47216 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47219 \begin_layout Description
47221 \begin_inset space ~
47225 \begin_inset space ~
47228 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47229 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47232 \begin_layout Description
47234 \begin_inset space ~
47238 \begin_inset space ~
47241 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47245 \begin_layout Description
47247 \begin_inset space ~
47251 \begin_inset space ~
47254 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47255 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47258 \begin_layout Description
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47264 \begin_inset space ~
47268 \begin_inset space ~
47271 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47272 \begin_inset space ~
47278 \begin_layout Description
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47284 \begin_inset space ~
47288 \begin_inset space ~
47291 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47292 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47295 \begin_layout Description
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47304 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47305 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47306 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47307 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47308 \begin_inset space ~
47312 \begin_inset space ~
47318 \begin_layout Description
47320 \begin_inset space ~
47324 \begin_inset space ~
47327 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47328 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47329 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47331 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47332 \begin_inset space ~
47336 \begin_inset space ~
47342 \begin_layout Description
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47348 \begin_inset space ~
47351 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47354 \begin_layout Description
47356 \begin_inset space ~
47360 \begin_inset space ~
47363 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47366 \begin_layout Description
47368 \begin_inset space ~
47372 \begin_inset space ~
47375 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47378 \begin_layout Description
47380 \begin_inset space ~
47383 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47386 \begin_layout Description
47388 \begin_inset space ~
47391 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47394 \begin_layout Description
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47400 \begin_inset space ~
47403 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47406 \begin_layout Description
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47412 \begin_inset space ~
47418 \begin_layout Description
47420 \begin_inset space ~
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47427 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47430 \begin_layout Description
47432 \begin_inset space ~
47436 \begin_inset space ~
47442 \begin_layout Description
47444 \begin_inset space ~
47448 \begin_inset space ~
47451 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47457 \begin_inset Index idx
47460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47467 , when using this, set the document language to
47472 \begin_layout Description
47474 \begin_inset space ~
47478 \begin_inset space ~
47481 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47486 , when using this, set the document language to
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47495 \begin_layout Description
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47501 \begin_inset space ~
47504 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47510 \begin_inset Index idx
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47515 packages ! japanese
47520 , when using this, set the document language to
47525 \begin_layout Description
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47534 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47539 , when using this, set the document language to
47544 \begin_layout Description
47546 \begin_inset space ~
47550 \begin_inset space ~
47553 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47558 , when using this, set the document language to
47563 \begin_layout Description
47565 \begin_inset space ~
47568 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47571 \begin_layout Description
47573 \begin_inset space ~
47577 \begin_inset space ~
47581 \begin_inset space ~
47584 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47587 \begin_layout Description
47589 \begin_inset space ~
47593 \begin_inset space ~
47597 \begin_inset space ~
47600 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47601 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47602 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47605 \begin_layout Description
47607 \begin_inset space ~
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47617 \begin_layout Description
47619 \begin_inset space ~
47623 \begin_inset space ~
47626 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47627 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47630 \begin_layout Description
47632 \begin_inset space ~
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47639 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47645 \begin_inset Index idx
47648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47655 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47656 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47658 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47659 with the default encoding (
47661 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47667 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47668 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47673 \begin_layout Description
47675 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47686 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47693 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47696 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47703 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47704 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47706 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47709 \begin_layout Description
47711 \begin_inset space ~
47715 \begin_inset space ~
47718 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47724 \begin_inset Index idx
47727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47735 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47738 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47740 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47741 This used to be more comprehensive than
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47749 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47754 \begin_layout Description
47756 \begin_inset space ~
47759 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47765 \begin_inset Index idx
47768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47770 packages ! inputenc
47777 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47778 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47780 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47781 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47782 with the default encoding (
47784 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47790 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47791 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47796 \begin_layout Description
47798 \begin_inset space ~
47802 \begin_inset space ~
47806 \begin_inset space ~
47809 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47810 \begin_inset space ~
47816 \begin_layout Description
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47829 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47830 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47831 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47835 \begin_layout Description
47837 \begin_inset space ~
47841 \begin_inset space ~
47845 \begin_inset space ~
47848 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47849 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47852 \begin_layout Section
47854 \begin_inset Index idx
47857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47864 \begin_inset Index idx
47867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47874 \begin_inset Index idx
47877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47878 Color ! Shaded boxes
47884 \begin_inset Index idx
47887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47888 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47896 \begin_layout Standard
47897 Here you can alter the font color for the
47901 (default: black), for
47904 \begin_inset space ~
47909 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47913 (default: white) and for
47916 \begin_inset space ~
47926 sets the color back to the default.
47929 \begin_layout Standard
47930 Clicking any button showing
47938 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47939 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47940 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47941 later more quickly.
47944 \begin_layout Standard
47945 Note, if you change the
47948 \begin_inset space ~
47953 font color and use the option
47956 \begin_inset space ~
47961 in the document settings under
47964 \begin_inset space ~
47969 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47970 \begin_inset space ~
47974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47976 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47983 \begin_layout Standard
47984 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47990 \begin_layout Standard
47994 \begin_inset space ~
48003 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
48006 \begin_inset space ~
48009 Code after a forced page break:
48012 \begin_layout Itemize
48013 For the page color:
48014 \begin_inset Newline newline
48021 pagecolor{color name}
48024 \begin_layout Itemize
48025 For the text color:
48026 \begin_inset Newline newline
48036 \begin_layout Standard
48037 You are restricted to one of
48073 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48080 \begin_inset space ~
48086 \begin_inset Newline newline
48089 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
48090 names to refer to them:
48093 \begin_layout Itemize
48099 \begin_inset Newline newline
48104 page_backgroundcolor
48107 \begin_layout Itemize
48111 \begin_inset space ~
48117 \begin_inset Newline newline
48125 \begin_layout Itemize
48129 \begin_inset space ~
48135 \begin_inset Newline newline
48143 \begin_layout Itemize
48147 \begin_inset space ~
48153 \begin_inset Newline newline
48161 \begin_layout Standard
48162 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48165 \begin_inset space ~
48173 \begin_inset space ~
48181 \begin_layout Section
48183 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
48187 \begin_layout Standard
48189 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
48190 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
48191 \begin_inset space ~
48195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48197 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48205 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48206 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48209 \begin_layout Standard
48211 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48212 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48214 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48217 \begin_layout Section
48221 \begin_layout Standard
48222 Here you can adjust the
48226 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48230 as described in section
48231 \begin_inset space ~
48235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48237 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48242 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48246 \begin_layout Standard
48248 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48249 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48251 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
48252 this package can be used as well.
48253 The most common one are:
48256 \begin_layout Description
48258 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48259 right Line numbers to the right margin
48262 \begin_layout Description
48264 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48265 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48269 \begin_layout Description
48271 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48272 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48275 \begin_layout Description
48277 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48278 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48281 \begin_layout Description
48283 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48284 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48287 \begin_layout Description
48289 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48291 \begin_inset space ~
48294 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48299 \begin_layout Section
48303 \begin_layout Standard
48304 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48310 \begin_inset Index idx
48313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48315 packages ! biblatex
48325 \begin_inset Index idx
48328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48340 \begin_inset Index idx
48343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48351 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48354 Sectioned bibliography
48356 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48362 \begin_inset Index idx
48365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48367 packages ! bibtopic
48377 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48378 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48382 for the generation of the bibliography.
48383 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48384 \begin_inset space ~
48388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48390 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48397 \begin_layout Section
48401 \begin_layout Standard
48402 Here you can define the
48406 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48408 \begin_inset space ~
48412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48414 reference "sec:Index"
48421 \begin_layout Section
48425 \begin_layout Standard
48426 The PDF properties are explained in section
48427 \begin_inset space ~
48431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48433 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48440 \begin_layout Section
48444 \begin_layout Standard
48445 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48446 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48452 \begin_inset Index idx
48455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48467 \begin_inset Index idx
48470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48482 \begin_inset Index idx
48485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48497 \begin_inset Index idx
48500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48512 \begin_inset Index idx
48515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48517 packages ! mathdots
48527 \begin_inset Index idx
48530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48532 packages ! mathtools
48542 \begin_inset Index idx
48545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48557 \begin_inset Index idx
48560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 packages ! stackrel
48572 \begin_inset Index idx
48575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 packages ! stmaryrd
48587 \begin_inset Index idx
48590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48592 packages ! undertilde
48597 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48600 \begin_layout Description
48601 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48602 -errors in formulas,
48603 ensure that you have this enabled.
48606 \begin_layout Description
48607 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48608 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48609 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48613 \begin_layout Description
48614 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48617 \begin_inset space ~
48629 \begin_layout Description
48630 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48633 \begin_inset space ~
48645 \begin_layout Description
48646 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48657 \begin_layout Description
48658 mathtools is used for the math commands
48694 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48701 \begin_layout Description
48702 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48704 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48713 \begin_layout Description
48714 stackrel is used for the math command
48731 \begin_layout Description
48732 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48735 \begin_layout Description
48736 undertilde is used for the math command
48744 Accents for one Character
48753 \begin_layout Section
48755 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48757 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48763 \begin_layout Standard
48765 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48766 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48769 \begin_layout Standard
48771 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48772 The float placement options
48773 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48776 are described in the section
48779 \begin_inset space ~
48783 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48785 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48793 \begin_inset space ~
48801 \begin_layout Section
48805 \begin_layout Standard
48806 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48808 Program Code Listings
48813 \begin_inset space ~
48821 \begin_layout Section
48825 \begin_layout Standard
48826 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48834 set to be used and set the
48839 The itemize environment is described in section
48840 \begin_inset space ~
48844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48846 reference "sec:Itemize"
48853 \begin_layout Standard
48854 You can furthermore specify a
48857 \begin_inset space ~
48862 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48863 command of the desired character.
48864 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48871 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48877 \begin_inset space \space{}
48881 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48891 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48892 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48895 \begin_layout Standard
48896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48904 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48905 -packages in the preamble (menu
48908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48912 \begin_inset space ~
48918 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48922 usepackage{textcomp}
48925 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48929 usepackage{amssymb}
48939 \begin_layout Section
48943 \begin_layout Standard
48944 Branches are described in section
48945 \begin_inset space ~
48949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48951 reference "sec:Branches"
48958 \begin_layout Section
48960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48962 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48969 \begin_layout Standard
48970 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48973 \begin_layout Description
48975 \begin_inset space ~
48979 \begin_inset space ~
48982 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49002 View Master Document
49003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49010 Update Master Document
49011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49018 menu or the toolbar.
49019 The default is set in
49021 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49022 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49024 \begin_inset space ~
49027 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49031 \begin_inset space ~
49035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49037 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49044 \begin_layout Description
49046 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
49048 \begin_inset space ~
49052 \begin_inset space ~
49056 \begin_inset space ~
49059 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
49064 option which is needed with some packages.
49065 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
49066 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
49069 \begin_layout Description
49071 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
49073 \begin_inset space ~
49077 \begin_inset space ~
49080 Options offers settings for the
49088 \begin_layout Itemize
49092 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
49094 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
49096 \begin_inset space ~
49102 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
49104 \begin_inset space ~
49108 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
49114 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
49116 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
49117 settings for the menu
49119 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49123 \begin_inset space ~
49127 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
49130 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
49131 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
49136 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49138 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
49140 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49143 or a detailed description see section
49145 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49150 \begin_inset space ~
49156 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
49160 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
49164 \begin_layout Itemize
49166 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
49169 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
49171 determines whether so-called
49172 \begin_inset Quotes els
49176 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49180 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
49182 \begin_inset Quotes els
49186 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49189 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
49190 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
49191 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
49193 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
49195 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
49196 macros, you can uncheck this.
49197 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49204 \begin_layout Description
49206 \begin_inset space ~
49210 \begin_inset space ~
49213 Options offers settings for the export format
49221 \begin_inset space ~
49226 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49227 \begin_inset space ~
49230 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49234 \begin_inset space ~
49239 settings are described in detail in section
49241 Math Output in XHTML
49246 \begin_inset space ~
49255 \begin_inset space ~
49259 \begin_inset space ~
49264 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49267 \begin_layout Description
49269 \begin_inset space ~
49274 Save transient properties
49276 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49277 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49278 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49282 \begin_layout Itemize
49283 the activation of change tracking
49286 \begin_layout Itemize
49287 the output of tracked changes
49290 \begin_layout Itemize
49291 the recording of the document directory path.
49294 \begin_layout Standard
49295 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49296 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49300 \begin_layout Section
49308 \begin_layout Standard
49309 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49311 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49313 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49315 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49319 \begin_layout Standard
49320 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49321 -syntax is given in section
49322 \begin_inset space ~
49326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49328 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49335 \begin_layout Chapter
49341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49343 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49348 \begin_inset Index idx
49351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49360 \begin_layout Standard
49361 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49363 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49367 It has the following submenus.
49370 \begin_layout Section
49374 \begin_layout Subsection
49378 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49379 User Interface File
49380 \begin_inset Index idx
49383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49384 Customization ! of toolbars
49390 \begin_inset Index idx
49393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49394 Customization ! of menus
49402 \begin_layout Standard
49403 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49404 interface (ui) file.
49405 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49413 \begin_layout Description
49418 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49421 \begin_layout Description
49428 the menu entries in popup context menus
49431 \begin_layout Description
49436 specifies the toolbar buttons
49439 \begin_layout Standard
49440 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49441 and edit the entries.
49444 \begin_layout Standard
49445 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49457 entries must be finished with an explicit
49482 and in the case of the
49483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49495 The syntax for the entries is:
49498 \begin_layout Standard
49499 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49528 \begin_layout Standard
49530 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49533 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49534 -functions are listed in the menu
49536 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49538 \begin_inset space ~
49546 \begin_layout Standard
49547 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49553 \begin_layout Standard
49554 For example, assuming you use the menu
49556 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49559 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49563 \begin_layout Standard
49564 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49588 \begin_layout Standard
49590 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49605 to have the sixth bookmark.
49608 \begin_layout Standard
49612 \begin_inset space ~
49617 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49618 's toolbar buttons.
49619 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49623 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49635 \begin_layout Standard
49638 Enable tool tips in main work area
49640 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49648 \begin_layout Standard
49653 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49654 should display in the menu
49656 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49658 \begin_inset space ~
49666 \begin_layout Subsection
49670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49674 \begin_layout Standard
49677 Restore window layouts and geometries
49680 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49681 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49685 \begin_layout Standard
49688 Restore cursor positions
49690 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49694 \begin_layout Standard
49697 Load opened files from last session
49699 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49703 \begin_layout Standard
49706 Clear all session information
49708 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49709 sessions (cursor positions, names
49710 of last opened documents, etc.).
49713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49717 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49722 \begin_inset Index idx
49725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49734 \begin_layout Standard
49737 Backup original documents when saving
49739 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49740 it was saved the last time.
49741 It is stored in the
49744 \begin_inset space ~
49750 \begin_inset space ~
49754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49756 reference "sec:Paths"
49760 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49763 \begin_inset space ~
49769 The backup file has the file extension
49770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49784 \begin_layout Standard
49787 Backup documents, every
49789 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49792 \begin_layout Standard
49795 Save documents compressed by default
49797 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49798 \begin_inset space ~
49802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49804 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49809 This applies to newly created documents only.
49810 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49813 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49814 Windows & work area
49817 \begin_layout Standard
49820 Open documents in tabs
49822 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49826 \begin_layout Standard
49831 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49838 \begin_inset space ~
49842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49844 reference "sec:Paths"
49848 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49855 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49856 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49857 of \SpecialChar LyX
49859 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49860 instance is created for each file.
49863 \begin_layout Standard
49866 Single close-tab button
49868 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49878 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49879 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49880 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49884 \begin_layout Standard
49885 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49893 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49894 before the change takes effect.
49902 \begin_layout Standard
49907 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49909 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49911 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49915 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49916 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49917 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49920 \begin_layout Subsection
49922 \begin_inset Index idx
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49934 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49941 \begin_layout Standard
49942 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49946 \begin_layout Standard
49947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49955 This section only deals with the fonts
49959 the \SpecialChar LyX
49961 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49965 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49976 \begin_layout Standard
49977 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49994 (depends on the system) as its
49997 \begin_inset space ~
50013 \begin_layout Standard
50014 You can change the font size with the
50021 \begin_layout Standard
50026 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50031 points have the size of 1
50032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50036 \begin_inset space ~
50040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50042 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50047 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50052 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50053 \begin_inset space ~
50057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50059 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
50066 \begin_layout Subsection
50068 \begin_inset Index idx
50071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50072 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
50079 \begin_inset Index idx
50082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50091 \begin_layout Standard
50092 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50093 by choosing an item in the
50094 list and selecting the
50101 \begin_layout Standard
50102 By checking the option
50106 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50109 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
50110 \begin_inset space ~
50114 \begin_inset space ~
50119 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50122 \begin_layout Subsection
50124 \begin_inset Index idx
50127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50136 \begin_layout Standard
50137 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50141 \begin_layout Standard
50146 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50147 This feature is described in section
50148 \begin_inset space ~
50152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50154 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50161 \begin_layout Standard
50162 Checking the option
50165 \begin_inset space ~
50169 \begin_inset space ~
50173 \begin_inset space ~
50178 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50181 \begin_layout Section
50183 \begin_inset Index idx
50186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50195 \begin_layout Subsection
50199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50203 \begin_layout Standard
50206 Cursor follows scrollbar
50208 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50212 \begin_layout Standard
50213 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50214 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50215 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50218 \begin_layout Standard
50221 Scroll below end of document
50223 is self-explanatory.
50226 \begin_layout Standard
50227 In \SpecialChar LyX
50228 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50235 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50237 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50238 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50239 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50243 \begin_layout Standard
50245 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
50248 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50250 is only relevant in documents that
50255 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
50264 markup) with this option selected.
50265 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
50267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50271 \begin_inset Quotes els
50275 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50279 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50280 dissolving from insets.
50285 track changes, pasted text is
50290 \begin_inset Quotes els
50294 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50297 notwithstanding the state of this option.
50302 \begin_layout Standard
50305 Sort environments alphabetically
50307 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50310 \begin_layout Standard
50313 Group environments by their category
50315 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50318 \begin_layout Standard
50323 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50332 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50336 \begin_layout Standard
50338 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50341 Search drive for cited files
50343 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50344 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50347 \begin_inset space ~
50351 \begin_inset space ~
50355 \begin_inset space ~
50359 \begin_inset space ~
50362 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50365 context menu on a citation.
50370 field determines the search pattern.
50372 \begin_inset space ~
50376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50378 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50391 \begin_layout Standard
50392 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50397 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50398 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50402 \begin_layout Subsection
50404 \begin_inset Index idx
50407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50414 \begin_inset Index idx
50417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50418 Settings ! Shortcuts
50426 \begin_layout Standard
50431 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50433 Several binding files are available, among them:
50436 \begin_layout Description
50437 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50440 \begin_layout Description
50441 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50453 \begin_layout Description
50454 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50465 \begin_layout Standard
50466 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50471 , and binding files for special languages.
50472 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50477 \begin_inset space \space{}
50481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50489 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50490 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50491 will try to use the appropriate binding
50495 \begin_layout Standard
50496 Some binding files, like
50500 , only have a limited scope.
50501 When looking at the end of the file
50505 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50508 \begin_layout Standard
50512 \begin_inset space ~
50516 \begin_inset space ~
50521 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50522 in the selected key binding file.
50525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50529 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50534 \begin_inset Index idx
50537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50538 Key Bindings ! Editing
50546 \begin_layout Standard
50547 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50548 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50549 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50550 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50553 Show key-bindings containing
50556 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50557 Insert there for example as keyword
50558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50565 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50566 functions that contain
50567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50575 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50576 All \SpecialChar LyX
50577 functions are also listed in the file
50582 that you will find in the
50589 \begin_layout Standard
50590 For example, to add the shortcut
50598 , select the function and press the
50603 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50604 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50607 \begin_layout Standard
50608 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50609 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50614 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50616 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50621 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50624 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50628 \begin_layout Standard
50629 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50632 \begin_layout Standard
50633 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50635 The syntax of the entries is:
50638 \begin_layout Standard
50644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50663 \begin_layout Standard
50664 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50665 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50693 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50694 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50695 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50696 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50698 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50702 , you needed to specify it as
50707 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50710 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50713 \begin_layout Subsection
50715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50717 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50722 \begin_inset Index idx
50725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50732 \begin_inset Index idx
50735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50736 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50744 \begin_layout Standard
50745 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50746 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50747 provides keyboard maps.
50748 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50749 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50752 \begin_inset space ~
50756 \begin_inset space ~
50761 and select the keyboard map file named
50768 \begin_layout Standard
50777 keyboard map and, if you use the
50781 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50784 arg "keymap-primary"
50790 arg "keymap-secondary"
50793 respectively or toggle between them with
50796 arg "keymap-toggle"
50802 \begin_layout Standard
50803 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50811 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50820 \begin_layout Standard
50821 You can also specify the mouse
50823 Wheel scrolling speed
50826 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50830 Middle mouse button pasting
50832 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50833 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50836 \begin_layout Standard
50844 \begin_inset space ~
50848 \begin_inset space ~
50853 you can select a key for zooming.
50854 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50857 \begin_layout Subsection
50861 \begin_layout Standard
50862 Input completion is described in section
50863 \begin_inset space ~
50867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50869 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50876 \begin_layout Section
50878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50885 \begin_inset Index idx
50888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50895 \begin_inset Index idx
50898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50907 \begin_layout Standard
50908 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50909 are normally determined during
50911 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50914 \begin_layout Description
50916 \begin_inset space ~
50919 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50920 's working directory.
50921 It is the default when you
50932 \begin_inset space ~
50940 \begin_layout Description
50942 \begin_inset space ~
50945 templates This directory
50946 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50947 contains the templates that are shown
50948 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50949 will be opened when you use the menu
50950 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50955 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50957 \begin_inset space ~
50961 \begin_inset space ~
50969 \begin_layout Description
50971 \begin_inset space ~
50974 files This directory
50975 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50976 will be opened when you use the
50977 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50978 contains the example files that are listed in
50981 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50990 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50992 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50994 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
51000 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
51002 \begin_inset Newline newline
51006 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51018 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51019 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51029 \begin_layout Description
51031 \begin_inset space ~
51035 \begin_inset Index idx
51038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51044 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51045 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51046 \begin_inset space ~
51050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51052 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51060 will be used to save the backups.
51061 \begin_inset Newline newline
51064 Backup files have the ending
51065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51075 \begin_layout Description
51077 \begin_inset space ~
51080 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
51081 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
51083 \begin_inset Newline newline
51090 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51096 You can edit this file with the program
51105 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
51106 in its preferences under
51109 \begin_inset space ~
51115 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
51120 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51122 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
51123 in your \SpecialChar LyX
51129 and \SpecialChar LyX
51130 need to be running the same time.
51131 \begin_inset Newline newline
51134 The pipe is also used for the
51138 feature, see section
51139 \begin_inset space ~
51143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51145 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51150 \begin_inset Newline newline
51153 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
51154 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
51155 \begin_inset Newline newline
51171 \begin_layout Description
51173 \begin_inset space ~
51176 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51179 \begin_layout Description
51181 \begin_inset space ~
51184 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51185 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51186 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51189 \begin_layout Description
51191 \begin_inset space ~
51194 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51200 You only need to specify it if you are using
51204 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51206 For \SpecialChar LyX
51211 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51215 \begin_layout Description
51217 \begin_inset space ~
51220 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51221 When \SpecialChar LyX
51222 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51223 to find it on the system.
51224 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51226 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51235 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51236 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51239 \begin_layout Description
51241 \begin_inset space ~
51244 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51245 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51246 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51247 code or in the document
51249 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51251 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51252 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51253 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51254 scanned for the input files.
51255 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51256 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51258 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51259 compilation may fail for some documents.
51262 \begin_layout Section
51266 \begin_layout Standard
51267 Here you can insert your
51276 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51278 \begin_inset space ~
51282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51284 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51288 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51291 \begin_layout Section
51293 \begin_inset Index idx
51296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51297 Language ! Settings
51303 \begin_inset Index idx
51306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51307 Settings ! Language
51315 \begin_layout Subsection
51317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51319 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51326 \begin_layout Description
51328 \begin_inset space ~
51332 \begin_inset space ~
51335 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51337 You can find its actual translation status here:
51338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51340 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51346 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51352 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51353 LaTeX Language Support
51358 \begin_layout Description
51360 \begin_inset space ~
51363 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51364 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51365 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51366 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51383 The most widespread language package is
51388 \begin_inset Index idx
51391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51398 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51400 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51401 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51402 come with the alternative
51408 \begin_inset Index idx
51411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51413 packages ! polyglossia
51418 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51419 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51425 The available selections are described in section
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51432 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51439 \begin_layout Description
51441 \begin_inset space ~
51445 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51446 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51447 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51449 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51453 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51457 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51459 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51463 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51464 that is used to switch to a different language
51465 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51466 to start the package
51470 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51471 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51475 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51476 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51479 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51483 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51491 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51499 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51502 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51504 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51526 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51527 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51534 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51535 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51540 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51545 , this setting is ignored.
51550 \begin_layout Description
51552 \begin_inset space ~
51556 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51563 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51564 Use this if the language switch set in
51568 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51572 's alternative command
51576 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51577 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51580 end{otherlanguage*}
51584 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51585 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51586 command toggles the package on and off
51587 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51588 Empty by default, as
51592 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51594 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51599 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51605 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51610 , this setting is ignored.
51615 \begin_layout Description
51617 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51619 \begin_inset space ~
51623 \begin_inset space ~
51626 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51630 \begin_layout Description
51632 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51634 \begin_inset space ~
51638 \begin_inset space ~
51641 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51647 \begin_layout Description
51649 \begin_inset space ~
51653 \begin_inset space ~
51657 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51659 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51662 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51663 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51666 to the document class options
51667 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51668 rather than the language package options.
51669 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51673 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51674 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51676 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51677 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51679 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51684 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51685 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51694 \begin_layout Description
51696 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51698 \begin_inset space ~
51702 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51704 \begin_inset space ~
51708 \begin_inset space ~
51712 \begin_inset space ~
51718 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51720 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51723 this option is set,
51724 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51725 the language switch defined in
51728 \begin_inset space ~
51733 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51734 to the document language.
51735 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51736 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51739 \begin_inset space ~
51744 or if a package resets the document language.
51745 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51746 usually should be the document language).
51747 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51748 documents start with the chosen document language.
51749 When this option is not set, the
51752 \begin_inset space ~
51757 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51759 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51762 \begin_inset space ~
51772 \begin_layout Description
51774 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51776 \begin_inset space ~
51780 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51782 \begin_inset space ~
51786 \begin_inset space ~
51790 \begin_inset space ~
51796 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51800 \begin_inset space ~
51804 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51805 Set document language explicitly
51811 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51813 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51819 \begin_inset space ~
51825 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51827 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51831 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51833 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51836 the end of the document.
51837 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51842 \paragraph_spacing single
51844 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51850 \begin_layout Description
51852 \begin_inset space ~
51856 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51858 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51862 \begin_inset space ~
51866 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51868 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51870 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51874 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51877 in a language different
51878 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51880 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51883 the document language will be
51884 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51885 marked (by default with a blue
51888 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51890 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51894 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51898 \begin_layout Description
51900 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51902 \begin_inset space ~
51906 \begin_inset space ~
51910 \begin_inset space ~
51913 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51914 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51915 switched via the operating system.
51916 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51921 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51922 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51927 \begin_layout Description
51929 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51931 \begin_inset space ~
51935 \begin_inset space ~
51938 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51939 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51944 \begin_layout Description
51946 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51948 \begin_inset space ~
51952 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51954 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51958 \begin_inset space ~
51962 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51963 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51964 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51966 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51970 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51972 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51973 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51975 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51976 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51977 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51979 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51984 \begin_layout Standard
51989 means that the cursor
51990 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51991 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51992 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51997 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51998 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
52002 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
52004 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
52005 specific case always means: move
52009 in text (even if this means:
52015 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52016 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
52017 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
52018 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
52019 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
52020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52031 \begin_layout Standard
52033 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
52038 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
52039 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
52040 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
52044 ) when coming from the left.
52045 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
52047 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52048 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
52049 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
52054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52056 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
52060 \begin_layout Description
52062 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
52064 \begin_inset space ~
52068 \begin_inset space ~
52071 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
52072 separator alignment).
52073 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
52075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52078 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
52079 (static) custom character here.
52082 \begin_layout Description
52084 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
52086 \begin_inset space ~
52090 \begin_inset space ~
52093 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52099 \begin_layout Subsection
52103 \begin_layout Standard
52104 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
52105 \begin_inset space ~
52109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52111 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
52118 \begin_layout Section
52122 \begin_layout Subsection
52124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52126 name "subsec:General-output"
52133 \begin_layout Description
52135 \begin_inset space ~
52138 search Commands that will be used for the menu
52140 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52142 \begin_inset space ~
52148 For a detailed description see section
52150 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52155 \begin_inset space ~
52163 \begin_layout Description
52165 \begin_inset space ~
52168 Options Options for the program
52172 that is used for the export format
52177 \begin_inset space ~
52181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52183 reference "subsec:Export"
52188 Possible options are listed in the
52193 \begin_inset Newline newline
52197 \begin_inset Flex URL
52200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52202 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52212 \begin_layout Description
52214 \begin_inset space ~
52218 \begin_inset space ~
52221 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
52224 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52225 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52227 \begin_inset space ~
52233 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52236 \begin_layout Description
52238 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52240 \begin_inset space ~
52244 \begin_inset Index idx
52247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52254 \begin_inset Index idx
52257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52258 Settings ! Date format
52263 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52264 \begin_inset Newline newline
52268 \begin_inset Flex URL
52271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52273 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52279 \begin_inset Newline newline
52282 For example the format
52283 \begin_inset Newline newline
52287 \begin_inset Newline newline
52290 prints the date as day/month/year.
52295 \begin_layout Description
52297 \begin_inset space ~
52301 \begin_inset space ~
52304 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52305 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52308 \begin_layout Subsection
52314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52316 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52321 \begin_inset Index idx
52324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52325 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52334 \begin_layout Description
52336 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52338 \begin_inset space ~
52346 \begin_inset space ~
52350 \begin_inset space ~
52353 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52358 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52379 are used for Cyrillic.
52380 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52393 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52395 sets up in the background.
52396 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52401 \begin_layout Description
52403 \begin_inset space ~
52407 \begin_inset space ~
52411 \begin_inset space ~
52415 \begin_inset space ~
52418 options They only have an effect when the program
52422 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52425 \begin_layout Standard
52426 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52427 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52428 manuals of the applications.
52431 \begin_layout Description
52433 \begin_inset space ~
52436 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52437 \begin_inset space ~
52441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52443 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52450 \begin_layout Description
52452 \begin_inset space ~
52455 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52456 \begin_inset space ~
52460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52462 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52469 \begin_layout Description
52471 \begin_inset space ~
52474 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52475 \begin_inset space ~
52479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52481 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52488 \begin_layout Description
52494 \begin_inset space ~
52497 command Command for the program
52499 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52502 that is described in the section
52504 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52509 Additional Features
52514 \begin_layout Standard
52515 There are additionally the following options:
52518 \begin_layout Description
52520 \begin_inset space ~
52524 \begin_inset space ~
52528 \begin_inset space ~
52532 \begin_inset space ~
52537 \begin_inset space ~
52540 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52558 to separate folders.
52559 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52561 \begin_inset Index idx
52564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52571 \begin_inset Index idx
52574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52583 \begin_layout Description
52585 \begin_inset space ~
52589 \begin_inset space ~
52593 \begin_inset space ~
52597 \begin_inset space ~
52601 \begin_inset space ~
52605 \begin_inset space ~
52608 changes Removes all manually set
52614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52615 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52617 \begin_inset space ~
52622 dialog when changing the document class.
52625 \begin_layout Section
52627 \begin_inset space ~
52631 \begin_inset Index idx
52634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52643 \begin_layout Subsection
52645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52647 name "subsec:Converters"
52652 \begin_inset Index idx
52655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52664 \begin_layout Standard
52665 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52666 from one format to another.
52667 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52668 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52675 \begin_inset space ~
52680 field and press the
52685 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52689 \begin_inset space ~
52694 drop-down list, modify the
52698 field and press the
52705 \begin_layout Standard
52708 Converter File Cache
52714 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52716 Maximum Age (in days
52719 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52720 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52723 \begin_layout Standard
52724 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52725 definition, is described in the section
52736 \begin_layout Subsection
52738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52740 name "sec:File-Formats"
52745 \begin_inset Index idx
52748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52755 \begin_inset Index idx
52758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52767 \begin_layout Standard
52768 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52778 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52781 \begin_layout Standard
52782 You can also define the
52784 Default output format
52786 that is used when you use
52788 View, Update, View Master Document
52792 Update Master Document
52798 menu or the toolbar.
52801 \begin_layout Standard
52802 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52813 \begin_layout Standard
52814 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52816 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52817 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52818 This is done by specifying a
52823 More about this is described in the section
52834 \begin_layout Chapter
52835 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52837 \begin_inset Index idx
52840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52849 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52856 \begin_layout Standard
52858 \begin_inset space ~
52862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52864 reference "tab:Units"
52868 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52869 and used in this documentation.
52872 \begin_layout Standard
52873 \begin_inset Float table
52880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52881 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52899 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52907 \begin_inset Tabular
52908 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52909 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52911 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53065 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
53069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53336 scaled point (65536
53337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53404 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53528 % of original image width
53533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53617 \begin_layout Standard
53618 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53621 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53628 \begin_layout Bibliography
53629 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53630 LatexCommand bibitem
53637 The \SpecialChar LyX
53639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53642 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53648 \begin_inset Newline newline
53652 \begin_inset Flex URL
53655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53657 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53665 \begin_layout Bibliography
53666 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53667 LatexCommand bibitem
53668 key "latexcompanion"
53673 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53675 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53676 Companion Second Edition.
53679 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53682 \begin_layout Bibliography
53683 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53684 LatexCommand bibitem
53690 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53693 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53697 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53700 \begin_layout Bibliography
53701 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53702 LatexCommand bibitem
53711 : A Document Preparation System.
53714 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53717 \begin_layout Bibliography
53718 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53719 LatexCommand bibitem
53729 The \SpecialChar TeX
53733 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53736 \begin_layout Bibliography
53737 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53738 LatexCommand bibitem
53744 The \SpecialChar TeX
53746 \begin_inset Newline newline
53750 \begin_inset Flex URL
53753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53755 https://ctan.org/topic
53763 \begin_layout Bibliography
53764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53765 LatexCommand bibitem
53771 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53773 \begin_inset Newline newline
53777 \begin_inset Flex URL
53780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53782 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53790 \begin_layout Bibliography
53791 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53792 LatexCommand bibitem
53799 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53801 name "Documentation"
53802 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53809 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53813 \begin_inset Newline newline
53817 \begin_inset Flex URL
53820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53822 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53830 \begin_layout Bibliography
53831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53832 LatexCommand bibitem
53839 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53841 name "Documentation"
53842 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53847 how to use the program
53849 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53853 \begin_inset Newline newline
53857 \begin_inset Flex URL
53860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53862 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53870 \begin_layout Bibliography
53871 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53872 LatexCommand bibitem
53879 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53881 name "Documentation"
53882 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53887 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53893 \begin_inset Index idx
53896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53898 packages ! biblatex
53904 \begin_inset Newline newline
53908 \begin_inset Flex URL
53911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53913 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53921 \begin_layout Bibliography
53922 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53923 LatexCommand bibitem
53930 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53932 name "Documentation"
53933 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53938 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53944 \begin_inset Index idx
53947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53955 \begin_inset Newline newline
53959 \begin_inset Flex URL
53962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53964 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53972 \begin_layout Bibliography
53973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53974 LatexCommand bibitem
53981 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53983 name "Documentation"
53984 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53994 \begin_inset Newline newline
53998 \begin_inset Flex URL
54001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54003 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
54011 \begin_layout Bibliography
54012 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54013 LatexCommand bibitem
54014 key "makeindex-man"
54020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54023 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54033 \begin_inset Newline newline
54037 \begin_inset Flex URL
54040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54042 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54050 \begin_layout Bibliography
54051 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54052 LatexCommand bibitem
54059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54061 name "Documentation"
54062 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
54072 \begin_inset Newline newline
54076 \begin_inset Flex URL
54079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54081 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
54089 \begin_layout Bibliography
54090 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54091 LatexCommand bibitem
54098 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54100 name "Documentation"
54101 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
54106 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
54108 \begin_inset Newline newline
54112 \begin_inset Flex URL
54115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54117 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54125 \begin_layout Bibliography
54126 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54127 LatexCommand bibitem
54134 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54136 name "Documentation"
54137 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54142 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54148 \begin_inset Index idx
54151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54159 \begin_inset Newline newline
54163 \begin_inset Flex URL
54166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54168 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54176 \begin_layout Bibliography
54177 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54178 LatexCommand bibitem
54185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54187 name "Documentation"
54188 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54193 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54199 \begin_inset Index idx
54202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54204 packages ! enumitem
54210 \begin_inset Newline newline
54214 \begin_inset Flex URL
54217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54219 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54227 \begin_layout Bibliography
54228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54229 LatexCommand bibitem
54236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54238 name "Documentation"
54239 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54244 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54250 \begin_inset Index idx
54253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54255 packages ! fancyhdr
54261 \begin_inset Newline newline
54265 \begin_inset Flex URL
54268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54270 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54278 \begin_layout Bibliography
54279 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54280 LatexCommand bibitem
54287 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54289 name "Documentation"
54290 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54295 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54301 \begin_inset Index idx
54304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54306 packages ! hyperref
54312 \begin_inset Newline newline
54316 \begin_inset Flex URL
54319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54321 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54329 \begin_layout Bibliography
54330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54331 LatexCommand bibitem
54338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54340 name "Documentation"
54341 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54346 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54352 \begin_inset Index idx
54355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54357 packages ! microtype
54363 \begin_inset Newline newline
54367 \begin_inset Flex URL
54370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54372 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54380 \begin_layout Bibliography
54381 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54382 LatexCommand bibitem
54389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54391 name "Documentation"
54392 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54397 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54403 \begin_inset Index idx
54406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54414 \begin_inset Newline newline
54418 \begin_inset Flex URL
54421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54423 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54431 \begin_layout Bibliography
54432 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54433 LatexCommand bibitem
54440 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54442 name "Documentation"
54443 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54448 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54454 \begin_inset Index idx
54457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54459 packages ! prettyref
54465 \begin_inset Newline newline
54469 \begin_inset Flex URL
54472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54474 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54482 \begin_layout Bibliography
54483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54484 LatexCommand bibitem
54491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54493 name "Documentation"
54494 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54499 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54505 \begin_inset Index idx
54508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54510 packages ! refstyle
54516 \begin_inset Newline newline
54520 \begin_inset Flex URL
54523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54525 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54533 \begin_layout Bibliography
54534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54535 LatexCommand bibitem
54542 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54545 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54550 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54552 \begin_inset Newline newline
54556 \begin_inset Flex URL
54559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54561 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54569 \begin_layout Bibliography
54570 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54571 LatexCommand bibitem
54578 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54581 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54586 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54588 \begin_inset Newline newline
54592 \begin_inset Flex URL
54595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54597 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54605 \begin_layout Bibliography
54606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54607 LatexCommand bibitem
54614 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54617 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54622 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54623 for Cyrillic languages:
54624 \begin_inset Newline newline
54628 \begin_inset Flex URL
54631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54633 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54641 \begin_layout Bibliography
54642 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54643 LatexCommand bibitem
54650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54653 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54658 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54660 \begin_inset Newline newline
54664 \begin_inset Flex URL
54667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54669 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54677 \begin_layout Bibliography
54678 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54679 LatexCommand bibitem
54686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54689 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54694 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54696 \begin_inset Newline newline
54700 \begin_inset Flex URL
54703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54705 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54713 \begin_layout Bibliography
54714 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54715 LatexCommand bibitem
54722 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54725 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54730 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54732 \begin_inset Newline newline
54736 \begin_inset Flex URL
54739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54741 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54749 \begin_layout Standard
54750 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54784 \begin_inset Note Note
54787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54794 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54795 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54796 bibliography is the second one:
54804 \begin_layout Standard
54805 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54806 LatexCommand bibtex
54807 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54808 options "biblio/alphadin"
54815 \begin_layout Standard
54816 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54820 \begin_layout Standard
54824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54830 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54839 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54847 \begin_inset Note Note
54850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54851 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54852 \begin_inset space ~
54856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54858 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54870 \begin_layout Standard
54871 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54872 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54878 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54879 LatexCommand printindex